Sei sulla pagina 1di 342

Beta Draft Confidential

Beta Draft Confidential

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch


Hardware Installation Guide

Product Code: 80077


Revision 12
August 2004
Copyright© 2003 Lucent Technologies. All Rights Reserved.

This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other
countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity
(either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with
applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of
Lucent Technologies.

For permission to reproduce or distribute, please contact: Technical Publications,


Integrated Network Solutions/Core Switching Division at 978-692-2600.

Notice. Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was
complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to
change.

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules. This equipment has been


tested and found to comply with the limits.

Trademarks. NavisXtend and NavisCore are trademarks of Lucent Technologies.


IP Navigator, Navis, CBX 500, GX 550, and B-STDX 9000 are registered trademarks
of Lucent Technologies. Other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this
document belong to their respective owners.

Limited Warranty. Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty to this


product. For more information, see the hardware license agreement in this document.

Ordering Information. To order copies of this document, use the online ordering
instructions presented later in this guide.

Support Telephone Numbers. For technical support and other services, see the
customer support contact information in the “About This Guide” section of this
document.

ii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES LIMITED WARRANTY ON HARDWARE

Lucent Technologies warrants the GX 550 against defects in materials and


workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment. During the warranty
period, Lucent will, at its option, repair, replace, or refund the purchase price of any
defective product at no additional cost, provided you return it during the warranty
period, transportation charges prepaid, to Lucent. You must attach your name, address
and telephone number, a description of the problem(s), and a dated proof-of-purchase
bearing the serial number of each product returned for warranty service.

This warranty is limited to the original purchaser of the product and is not transferable
unless otherwise agreed by Lucent in writing. This warranty does not apply if the
product: has been damaged by accident, abuse, misuse or misapplication; has been
modified without written permission by Lucent; or if any Lucent serial number has
been removed or defaced.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL LUCENT’S LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE PRODUCT
IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), OR OTHERWISE, EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF
THE PRODUCT. LUCENT MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATIONS, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, ITS QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS IN A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE
OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OF THE PRODUCT.

THIS WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF
ALL OTHERS, ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. No Lucent dealer, agent, or
employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this
warranty.
LUCENT IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, OR UNDER ANY LEGAL
THEORY, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR
REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COST OF RECOVERING,
REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED
WITH LUCENT’S PRODUCTS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights
which vary from state to state.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04iii


Beta Draft Confidential
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA AND
DOCUMENTATION

Lucent Technologies also warrants that the media on which the Software is distributed
and the Documentation are free from defects in materials and workmanship. Lucent
will replace defective media or documentation, provided you return the item with
dated proof of purchase to Lucent within 90 days of the date of delivery.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION WARNING

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and

This device must withstand any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

The GX 550 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio and television
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or
her own expense.

Shielded cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with the FCC Class
A limits.

Do not attempt to repair or modify this equipment. Any repairs to the unit must be
performed by Lucent Technologies or a Lucent-authorized representative.

iv8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

Maintenance Agreements
Lucent offers a comprehensive program to provide hardware support, a 24-hour
emergency hotline, overnight parts replacement, and an escalation procedure.
Non-contract maintenance services are provided at current time-and-materials rates.

For more information, contact Lucent Technical Assistance Center (TAC) at


1-866-LUCENT8 (in the U.S.). For international telephone numbers see “Technical
Support” in “About This Guide.”

Lucent has adopted a maintenance strategy based on customer-initiated requests to the


Lucent TAC. The TAC coordinates all customer services, including hardware and
software technical support, on-site service requirements, and module exchange and
repair.

If the Product Is Damaged


If any portion of the switch is damaged, forward an immediate request to the delivering
carrier to perform an inspection of the product and to prepare a damage report. Save
the container and all packing materials until the contents are verified.

Concurrently, report the nature and extent of the damage to the Lucent TAC so that
action can be initiated, either to repair or replace the damaged items.

Do not return any items to Lucent until you obtain instructions from a TAC
representative. Report the problem or deficiency to the TAC representative, along
with the model, type, and serial number. Upon receipt of this information, Lucent will
provide you with service instructions, or a Return Authorization Number and shipping
information. All items returned under warranty must be shipped to the manufacturer
with the charges prepaid.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04v


Beta Draft Confidential

If Problems Arise
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately
remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If
the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily discontinue service.
When practical, they notify you in advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is
not feasible, you will be notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will
be given the opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC.

In the event that repairs are ever needed on this equipment, they should be performed
by Lucent Technologies or an authorized Lucent representative. For information
contact the Lucent TAC at 1-866-LUCENT8 (in the U.S.). For international telephone
numbers see “Technical Support” in “About This Guide.”

vi8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

Contents
Maintenance Agreements..............................................................................................v
If the Product Is Damaged.............................................................................................v
If Problems Arise...................................................................................................vi

About This Guide


What You Need to Know..........................................................................................xxv
Reading Path ............................................................................................................xxvi
Documentation for New Modules.........................................................................xxvii
How to Use This Guide..........................................................................................xxviii
What’s New in This Guide?.....................................................................................xxix
Conventions..............................................................................................................xxxi
Related Documents .................................................................................................xxxii
Lucent ...............................................................................................................xxxii
Ordering Printed Manuals Online ..........................................................................xxxiii
Customer Comments..............................................................................................xxxiii
Technical Support ..................................................................................................xxxiii

Chapter 1 Overview
GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Description .......................................................1-1
GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Features.............................................................1-3
Hardware Module Descriptions .................................................................................1-3
Module Locations ................................................................................................1-4
Base Input/Output Modules.................................................................................1-6
Number of Supported Modules.....................................................................1-6
Interfaces to Switch Fabric ...........................................................................1-6
Interfaces to Physical Interface Modules ......................................................1-7

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide vii


Contents

Switch Fabric Module ......................................................................................... 1-7


Number of Supported Modules .................................................................... 1-7
Node Processor Module ...................................................................................... 1-8
Number of Supported Modules .................................................................... 1-8
Cell Thread Interface .................................................................................... 1-8
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules ........................ 1-9
Number of Supported Modules .................................................................... 1-9
Automatic Protection Switching Redundancy.............................................. 1-9
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module................................................................... 1-10
Number of Supported Modules .................................................................. 1-10
Interfaces with Other Modules ................................................................... 1-10
Node Processor Adapter Module ...................................................................... 1-10
Number of Supported Modules .................................................................. 1-11
Timing Module.................................................................................................. 1-11
Number of Supported Modules .................................................................. 1-11

Chapter 2 Specifications and Safety Warnings


Electronic/Electrical Requirements ........................................................................... 2-1
Power Specifications........................................................................................... 2-1
Wiring Size.......................................................................................................... 2-2
Transient Power Protection for DC Power Sources............................................ 2-2
AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit..................................................................................... 2-3
AC-to-DC Rectifier Required Features ........................................................ 2-3
Ordering an AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit .......................................................... 2-3
DC Input Power Protection Unit (DCPPU) ........................................................ 2-4
DCPPU Features........................................................................................... 2-5
DCPPU Front Panel...................................................................................... 2-6
DCPPU Cabling............................................................................................ 2-7
Applying Power to the DCPPU .................................................................. 2-10
Space Requirements ................................................................................... 2-11
Ordering a DCPPU ..................................................................................... 2-11
Physical Specifications ............................................................................................ 2-12
Site Specifications ................................................................................................... 2-13
Operating Environment..................................................................................... 2-13
Space Requirements .......................................................................................... 2-14
DC Power Supply Warnings.................................................................................... 2-15

viii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Safety Warnings .......................................................................................................2-16


Signes Précurseurs de Sécurité.................................................................................2-16
Achtung: Zusätzliche Sicherheitshinweise ..............................................................2-16

Chapter 3 Preparing for the Installation


Selecting the Installation Site.....................................................................................3-2
Checking the Switch for Damage ..............................................................................3-3
Moving the Switch to the Installation Site.................................................................3-4
Unpacking the Switch ................................................................................................3-4
Unpacking the Accessory Kit.....................................................................................3-5
Verifying the Hardware Configuration ......................................................................3-6
Before Handling Equipment................................................................................3-6
Checking the Node Processor and Switch Fabric Modules.................................3-7
Checking the Base Input/Output Modules...........................................................3-9
Checking the Phy Modules................................................................................3-10
Checking the Node Processor Adapter and Timing Modules ...........................3-12
What’s Next?............................................................................................................3-12

Chapter 4 Installing the GX 550


Before You Begin ......................................................................................................4-1
Required Installation Tools and Equipment...............................................................4-2
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch.......................................................................4-3
Equipment Rack Requirements ...........................................................................4-3
Installing the Equipment Rack ............................................................................4-4
Flush-mounting in a 19-inch Equipment Rack....................................................4-4
Mid-mounting in a 19-inch Equipment Rack ......................................................4-6
Flush-mounting in a 23-inch Equipment Rack....................................................4-8
Mid-mounting in a 23-inch Equipment or Telco Rack......................................4-10
Connecting Cables to the Switch .............................................................................4-13
Data Connections...............................................................................................4-13
Console Terminal Connections .........................................................................4-14
Shielded Cables...........................................................................................4-14
Cable and Pinout Information .....................................................................4-15
Directly Connecting a PC Console .............................................................4-15
Directly Connecting a SPARCstation Console...........................................4-16
Connecting a Remote Dial-up Console.......................................................4-16
Connecting the Switch to the NMS..........................................................................4-16
Before You Begin..............................................................................................4-16

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04ix


Contents

NMS Connection Methods................................................................................ 4-17


Using Direct Ethernet........................................................................................ 4-18
Using Indirect Ethernet ..................................................................................... 4-19
Using Management VC/PVC............................................................................ 4-20
External T1 Clock Source Connection .................................................................... 4-21
External T1 Clock Description.......................................................................... 4-21
Connecting the External T1 Clock.................................................................... 4-22
External E1 Clock Source Connection .................................................................... 4-23
External E1 Clock Description.......................................................................... 4-23
Connecting the External E1 Clock.................................................................... 4-23
Remote Alarm Connection ...................................................................................... 4-24
Remote Alarm Signals ...................................................................................... 4-24
Connecting Remote Alarms .............................................................................. 4-26

Chapter 5 Powering Up the GX 550


Before You Begin ...................................................................................................... 5-1
Powering Up Overview ............................................................................................. 5-2
Determining the Power Connection Methods............................................................ 5-2
Obtaining Required Tools and Materials................................................................... 5-3
Connecting Power Cables to the Switch.................................................................... 5-4
Applying Power to the Switch................................................................................... 5-7
What’s Next? ............................................................................................................. 5-7

Chapter 6 Determining the Operating Status


Viewing LEDs ........................................................................................................... 6-1
Module LED Locations ............................................................................................. 6-2
Node Processor Module ...................................................................................... 6-2
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module ....................................................................... 6-3
Switch Fabric Module ......................................................................................... 6-4
Phy Modules........................................................................................................ 6-5
Timing Module.................................................................................................... 6-6
Fan Tray Modules ............................................................................................... 6-6
Switch Status LEDs ................................................................................................... 6-7
Module Status LED Descriptions .............................................................................. 6-8
Node Processor and BIO Modules...................................................................... 6-8
Switch Fabric and Timing Modules.................................................................. 6-10
Phy Modules...................................................................................................... 6-11
Port Alarm LEDs ..................................................................................................... 6-12

x8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Port Numbering .................................................................................................6-13


Port Alarm Conditions.......................................................................................6-14
Redundancy Status LEDs (StnBy) ...........................................................................6-15
Node Processor Module.....................................................................................6-15
Switch Fabric and Timing Modules ..................................................................6-16
Fan Tray LEDs.........................................................................................................6-17

Chapter 7 Removing and Installing Components


Removal and Installation Precautions........................................................................7-2
Parts Repair..........................................................................................................7-2
Static Protection...................................................................................................7-2
Electrical Energy Hazard.....................................................................................7-2
Node Processor Module .............................................................................................7-3
Removing the NP Module ...................................................................................7-3
Installing the NP Module.....................................................................................7-6
Switch Fabric Module ................................................................................................7-8
Removing the SF Module....................................................................................7-8
Installing the SF Module ...................................................................................7-10
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module ............................................................................7-12
Removing a BIO Module ..................................................................................7-12
Potential Data Loss .....................................................................................7-12
Removal Steps.............................................................................................7-12
Installing a BIO Module ....................................................................................7-13
Upgrading From a BIO1 Module to a BIO2 Module ........................................7-15
Upgrade Steps .............................................................................................7-15
Performing a Sybase Upgrade Using NavisXtend Tools............................7-16
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules.......................7-18
Removing an OC Module..................................................................................7-18
Potential Data Loss .....................................................................................7-18
Removal Steps.............................................................................................7-18
Installing an OC Module ...................................................................................7-21
Before You Begin .......................................................................................7-21
Restrictions on Slot 12D .............................................................................7-22
Installation Steps .........................................................................................7-22
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module..........................................................................7-27
Removing a GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module...............................................7-27
Installing a GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module ................................................7-30
Before You Begin .......................................................................................7-30

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xi


Contents

Restrictions on Slot 12D............................................................................. 7-30


Installation Steps......................................................................................... 7-30
Timing Module ........................................................................................................ 7-34
Removing a Timing Module ............................................................................. 7-34
Installing a Timing Module............................................................................... 7-36
Node Processor Adapter Module............................................................................. 7-38
Removing the NPA ........................................................................................... 7-38
Installing the NPA............................................................................................. 7-39
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter................. 7-41
Removing the Fan Tray..................................................................................... 7-41
Installing the Fan Tray ...................................................................................... 7-43
Removing the Air Filter .................................................................................... 7-44
Installing the Air Filter...................................................................................... 7-45
Timing/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1) ................................................. 7-46
Running the Switch While Replacing Fan Trays.............................................. 7-46
Removing the Fan Tray..................................................................................... 7-46
Installing the Fan Tray ...................................................................................... 7-47
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter .......................................................... 7-49
Running the Switch While Replacing Fan Trays.............................................. 7-49
Removing the BIO Fan Tray............................................................................. 7-49
Installing the BIO Fan Tray .............................................................................. 7-51
Removing the BIO Air Filter ............................................................................ 7-53
Installing the BIO Air Filter.............................................................................. 7-54
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter ............................................ 7-55
Running the Switch While Replacing Fan Trays.............................................. 7-55
Removing the Phy Fan Tray ............................................................................. 7-55
Installing the Phy Fan Tray ............................................................................... 7-57
Removing the Phy Air Filter ............................................................................. 7-58
Installing the Phy Air Filter............................................................................... 7-60

Chapter 8 Node Processor 2 (NP2)


Enhanced Functionality ............................................................................................. 8-1
New Diagnostics and ITP Ports .......................................................................... 8-2
NP2 Interoperability With NP1........................................................................... 8-2
Valid Active/Standby Configurations .......................................................... 8-2
Upgrading from an NP1 to an NP2 .............................................................. 8-3
Forcing an NP Switchover......................................................................................... 8-3

xii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore ................................................8-4


Configuring the Node Processor to NP2 .............................................................8-4
Viewing the Node Processor Configuration........................................................8-8

Chapter 9 Upgrading the Node Processor


Introduction ................................................................................................................9-1
Prerequisites ...............................................................................................................9-3
Minimum Software Versions...............................................................................9-3
Before Handling the Equipment ..........................................................................9-3
NP Module Insertion ...........................................................................................9-4
Required Tools and Materials..............................................................................9-4
Software Installation ..................................................................................................9-4
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration..............................................9-5
NP Redundancy........................................................................................................9-15
Active NP Failure ..............................................................................................9-15
Standby NP Failure............................................................................................9-15
PRAM Synchronization.....................................................................................9-15
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration ..................................................9-16
Other Considerations................................................................................................9-26
Downgrading an NP2 to an NP1 .......................................................................9-26
Minimum Hardware Versions ...........................................................................9-26
Obsolete NP1 Software Image on the Standby NP ...........................................9-26
Obsolete NP1 Software Image on the Active NP..............................................9-26
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2......................................................9-27
Backout Procedure for Non-Redundant Configuration .....................................9-28
Backout Procedure for Redundant Configuration .............................................9-31

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Power-up Diagnostics for the Node Processor and Base Input/Output Modules ....10-2
Power-up Diagnostics Overview .......................................................................10-2
Equipment Requirements ..................................................................................10-2
Enabling and Displaying Power-Up Diagnostics ..............................................10-2
Node Processor Reboot of BIO Modules ..........................................................10-5
Switch Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................10-5
BIO Module Troubleshooting ..................................................................................10-7

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xiii


Contents

Appendix A Module Specifications


ATM Base Input/Output 1 Module........................................................................... A-2
Specifications ..................................................................................................... A-2
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................... A-2
Power Requirements.................................................................................... A-2
Temperature Range...................................................................................... A-2
Agency Approvals ....................................................................................... A-2
Standards ..................................................................................................... A-3
Front View................................................................................................... A-4
ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module .............................................................. A-5
Specifications ..................................................................................................... A-5
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................... A-5
Power Requirements.................................................................................... A-5
Temperature Range...................................................................................... A-5
Agency Approvals ....................................................................................... A-5
Standards ..................................................................................................... A-6
Front View................................................................................................... A-6
Node Processor Module (NP1 and NP2) .................................................................. A-8
Specifications ..................................................................................................... A-8
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................... A-8
Power Requirements.................................................................................... A-8
Temperature Range...................................................................................... A-8
Agency Approvals ....................................................................................... A-8
Physical Connectors .................................................................................... A-9
Front View................................................................................................... A-9
Switch Fabric Module............................................................................................. A-10
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-10
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-10
Power Requirements.................................................................................. A-10
Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-10
Agency Approvals ..................................................................................... A-10
Front View................................................................................................. A-11
OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module .................................................................................... A-12
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-12
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-12
Power Requirements.................................................................................. A-12
Agency Approvals ..................................................................................... A-12
Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-13

xiv8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

SONET Standards ......................................................................................A-13


SDH Standards...........................................................................................A-13
Physical Interfaces .....................................................................................A-13
Physical Connectors...................................................................................A-14
Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode IR [Laser] Optics)...........................A-14
Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode LR [Laser] Optics)..........................A-14
Signal Distance/Levels (Multimode [LED] Optics) ..................................A-14
Front View .................................................................................................A-15
OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module...................................................................................A-16
Specifications....................................................................................................A-16
Physical Dimensions ..................................................................................A-16
Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-16
Agency Approvals......................................................................................A-16
Temperature Range ....................................................................................A-17
SONET Standards ......................................................................................A-17
SDH Standards...........................................................................................A-17
Physical Interfaces .....................................................................................A-17
Physical Connectors...................................................................................A-18
Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode IR [Laser] Optics)...........................A-18
Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode LR [Laser] Optics)..........................A-18
Signal Distance/Levels (Multimode [LED] Optics) ..................................A-18
Front View .................................................................................................A-19
OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module...................................................................................A-20
Specifications....................................................................................................A-20
Physical Dimensions ..................................................................................A-20
Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-20
Agency Approvals......................................................................................A-20
Temperature Range ....................................................................................A-21
SONET Standards ......................................................................................A-21
SDH Standards...........................................................................................A-21
Physical Interfaces .....................................................................................A-21
Physical Connectors...................................................................................A-21
Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode IR [Laser] Optics)...........................A-22
Front View .................................................................................................A-23
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module.........................................................................A-24
Specifications....................................................................................................A-24
Physical Dimensions ..................................................................................A-24
Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-24

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xv


Contents

Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-24


Agency Approvals ..................................................................................... A-25
Signal Distance/Levels (Multimode [LED] Optics).................................. A-25
Physical Connector .................................................................................... A-25
Front View................................................................................................. A-26
Node Processor Adapter Module............................................................................ A-27
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-27
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-27
Power Requirements.................................................................................. A-27
Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-27
Agency Approvals ..................................................................................... A-27
Interface Standards .................................................................................... A-28
Other Standards Supported........................................................................ A-28
Physical Connectors .................................................................................. A-28
Front View................................................................................................. A-28
Timing Module ....................................................................................................... A-29
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-29
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-29
Power Requirements.................................................................................. A-29
Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-29
Agency Approvals ..................................................................................... A-29
Timing and Synchronization Standards Supported ................................... A-30
Front View................................................................................................. A-30
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3).................................................... A-31
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-31
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-31
Power Requirements.................................................................................. A-31
Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-31
Front View................................................................................................. A-32
Base Input/Output Fan Tray (No. 4)....................................................................... A-33
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-33
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-33
Power Requirements.................................................................................. A-33
Temperature Range.................................................................................... A-33
Front View................................................................................................. A-33
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) ............................................................................... A-34
Specifications ................................................................................................... A-34
Physical Dimensions.................................................................................. A-34

xvi8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-34


Temperature Range ....................................................................................A-34
Front View .................................................................................................A-34
Timing Module/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1) ...................................A-35
Specifications....................................................................................................A-35
Physical Dimensions ..................................................................................A-35
Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-35
Temperature Range ....................................................................................A-35
Front View .................................................................................................A-36
AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit.........................................................................................A-37
Specifications....................................................................................................A-37
Physical Dimensions ..................................................................................A-37
Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-37
Agency Approvals......................................................................................A-37
Temperature Range ....................................................................................A-37
Physical Connectors...................................................................................A-37
DC Input Power Protection Unit .............................................................................A-38
Specifications....................................................................................................A-38
Physical Dimensions ..................................................................................A-38
Power Requirements ..................................................................................A-38
Agency Approvals......................................................................................A-39
Temperature Range ....................................................................................A-39
Physical Connectors...................................................................................A-39

Appendix B Cables and Pinout Assignments


Purchasing Cables .....................................................................................................B-1
Shielded Cables.........................................................................................................B-2
Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable with 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter
B-2
Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable ........................................B-4
DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable ...............................................................B-6
RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic Cable ..................................................B-8
MPK Null Modem Converter..................................................................................B-10
NET MGMT Connector..........................................................................................B-12
EXT PWR ALARM Connector on Node Processor Adapter Module....................B-14

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xvii


Contents

Diagnostics Port Connector .................................................................................... B-16


Diagnostics Port for BIO1 or NP1 Modules .................................................... B-16
Diagnostics Port for BIO2 or NP2 Modules .................................................... B-18
Multimode Fiber Cable........................................................................................... B-20

Appendix C Regulatory Information


Regulatory Standards Compliance ........................................................................... C-1
Environmental .................................................................................................... C-1
Safety.................................................................................................................. C-1
EMC ................................................................................................................... C-2
Factory Approvals.............................................................................................. C-2
Radio Frequency Interference................................................................................... C-2
VCCI Statement........................................................................................................ C-3
BSMI Statement........................................................................................................ C-4

Appendix D Module Redundancy


Redundant Module Types......................................................................................... D-1
Setting Up Redundant Modules................................................................................ D-2
Node Processor Redundancy .................................................................................... D-4
Active NP Failure............................................................................................... D-4
Standby NP Failure ............................................................................................ D-4
PRAM Synchronization ..................................................................................... D-5
NP Switchovers ................................................................................................. D-5
Manual Switchover of Active NP ...................................................................... D-5
Switch Fabric and Timing Module Redundancy ...................................................... D-6
Active Switch Fabric or Timing Module Failure............................................... D-6
Active Switch Fabric or Timing Module Removal............................................ D-6
Manual Switchover of Active SF or Timing Module ........................................ D-6
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module Redundancy ..................................................... D-7
Redundancy Status ............................................................................................. D-7
Redundancy Status (StnBy) LEDs ........................................................................... D-8
Redundancy Status LED (StnBy) on Node Processor ....................................... D-8
Redundancy Status LED (StnBy) on Switch Fabric and Timing Modules........ D-9

xviii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Appendix E Fiber Cable Management


Fiber Cable Management Tray.................................................................................. E-1
Before Handling Equipment ..................................................................................... E-2
Required Tools and Materials............................................................................. E-3
Fiber Cable Management Tray Installation............................................................... E-3
Cable Distribution ..................................................................................................... E-6

Acronyms

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xix


Contents

List of Figures
Figure 1-1. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch - Front View.......................... 1-4
Figure 1-2. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch - Rear View........................... 1-5
Figure 2-1. DCPPU Front View - Dual Configuration ..................................... 2-4
Figure 2-2. DCPPU Front Panel........................................................................ 2-6
Figure 2-3. DCPPU Rear View with Cable Connections.................................. 2-9
Figure 3-1. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Shipment ............................... 3-3
Figure 3-2. ESD Grounding Jacks on GX 550 Switch...................................... 3-6
Figure 3-3. Front Bezel Removal...................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-4. Node Processor and Switch Fabric Locations (front)..................... 3-8
Figure 3-5. BIO Module Locations (front)........................................................ 3-9
Figure 3-6. Phy Module Locations (rear)........................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-7. Node Processor Adapter and Timing Module Locations
(rear) ............................................................................................. 3-12
Figure 4-1. Installing the GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch in an
Equipment Rack ............................................................................. 4-5
Figure 4-2. Installing the GX 550 Switch Using 7-inch Rack Extensions........ 4-7
Figure 4-3. Installing the GX 550 Switch using 23-inch Flush-Mount
Rack Extensions ............................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-4. Installing the GX 550 Switch using 23-inch Mid-mount
Rack Extensions ........................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-5. Connecting Fiber-Optic Cables (rear) .......................................... 4-13
Figure 4-6. Physical Port Numbering.............................................................. 4-14
Figure 4-7. Console Connection to a GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch
(rear) ............................................................................................. 4-15
Figure 4-8. Direct Ethernet Connection (rear) ................................................ 4-18
Figure 4-9. Indirect Ethernet Connection (rear).............................................. 4-19
Figure 4-10. Management VC/PVC Connection (rear) .................................... 4-20
Figure 4-11. Clock Connections (rear).............................................................. 4-22
Figure 4-12. Terminal Numbers for Terminal Block and Pin Numbers for
DB-26 Connector.......................................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-13. Remote Alarm Connector (rear)................................................... 4-27
Figure 5-1. Protective Covers on Power Connections ...................................... 5-4
Figure 5-2. Power Connections......................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-3. Connecting Power Signal Cable (rear) ........................................... 5-6
Figure 6-1. Node Processor Module LEDs ....................................................... 6-2

xx8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Figure 6-2. BIO Module LEDs.......................................................................... 6-3


Figure 6-3. Switch Fabric Module LEDs .......................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-4. Phy Module LEDs........................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-5. Timing Module LEDs ..................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-6. Switch Status LEDs on Node Processor Module............................ 6-7
Figure 6-7. Module Status LEDs on Node Processor Module .......................... 6-9
Figure 6-8. Module Status LEDs on BIO Module............................................. 6-9
Figure 6-9. Module Status LEDs on SF Module ............................................. 6-10
Figure 6-10. Module Status LEDs on Timing Module...................................... 6-10
Figure 6-11. Module Status LEDs on Phy Module ........................................... 6-11
Figure 6-12. Port Alarm LEDs on BIO Module ................................................ 6-12
Figure 6-13. Physical Port Numbering .............................................................. 6-13
Figure 6-14. StnBy LED on the Node Processor............................................... 6-15
Figure 6-15. StnBy LED on the SF Module ...................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-16. StnBy LED on the Timing Module............................................... 6-16
Figure 6-17. Fan Tray LEDs.............................................................................. 6-17
Figure 7-1. Removing the Front Bezel .............................................................. 7-4
Figure 7-2. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Node Processor ........................... 7-5
Figure 7-3. Removing the Node Processor........................................................ 7-5
Figure 7-4. Inserting the NP Module................................................................. 7-6
Figure 7-5. Securing the NP Module................................................................. 7-7
Figure 7-6. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Switch Fabric .............................. 7-8
Figure 7-7. Removing the Switch Fabric Module ............................................. 7-9
Figure 7-8. Inserting the SF Module................................................................ 7-10
Figure 7-9. Securing the SF Module................................................................ 7-11
Figure 7-10. Removing the BIO Module........................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-11. Installing the BIO Module ............................................................ 7-14
Figure 7-12. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Phy Module............................... 7-19
Figure 7-13. Releasing the Phy Module ............................................................ 7-20
Figure 7-14. Removing the Phy Module ........................................................... 7-21
Figure 7-15. Slot 12 and Phy Modules .............................................................. 7-22
Figure 7-16. Removal of the Phy Module Center Card Guide .......................... 7-23
Figure 7-17. Inserting the Phy Module.............................................................. 7-24
Figure 7-18. Locking the Phy Modules ............................................................. 7-25
Figure 7-19. Securing Thumbscrews on the Phy Module ................................. 7-26
Figure 7-20. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Downlink Phy Module.............. 7-28
Figure 7-21. Removing the Downlink Phy Module .......................................... 7-29
Figure 7-22. Inserting the Downlink Phy Module............................................. 7-31

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxi


Contents

Figure 7-23. Securing the Downlink Phy Module ............................................ 7-32


Figure 7-24. Releasing the Timing Module ...................................................... 7-35
Figure 7-25. Removing the Timing Module ..................................................... 7-35
Figure 7-26. Inserting and Locking the Timing Module................................... 7-36
Figure 7-27. Securing Thumbscrews on the Timing Module ........................... 7-37
Figure 7-28. Removing the Node Adapter Processor ....................................... 7-39
Figure 7-29. Installing the NPA Module........................................................... 7-40
Figure 7-30. Removing/Installing Bezel Over the SF/NP Fan Tray ................. 7-41
Figure 7-31. Removing the SF/NP Fan Tray .................................................... 7-42
Figure 7-32. Installing the SF/NP Fan Tray...................................................... 7-43
Figure 7-33. Removing the SF/NP Fan Tray Air Filter .................................... 7-44
Figure 7-34. Installing the SF/NP Fan Tray Air Filter...................................... 7-45
Figure 7-35. Removing the Timing/NPA Fan Tray .......................................... 7-47
Figure 7-36. Installing the Timing/NPA Fan Tray............................................ 7-48
Figure 7-37. Removing the Bezel Over the BIO Fan Tray ............................... 7-49
Figure 7-38. Removing the BIO Fan Tray Access Cover ................................. 7-50
Figure 7-39. Removing the BIO Fan Tray ........................................................ 7-50
Figure 7-40. Inserting the BIO Fan Tray........................................................... 7-51
Figure 7-41. Installing the BIO Fan Tray Access Cover................................... 7-52
Figure 7-42. Installing the Bezel Over the BIO Fan Tray................................. 7-52
Figure 7-43. Removing the BIO Fan Tray Filter .............................................. 7-53
Figure 7-44. Inserting the BIO Fan Tray Filter................................................. 7-54
Figure 7-45. Removing the Phy Modules Fan Tray Access Cover................... 7-55
Figure 7-46. Removing the Phy Modules Fan Tray.......................................... 7-56
Figure 7-47. Inserting the Phy Modules Fan Tray ............................................ 7-57
Figure 7-48. Installing the Phy Modules Fan Tray Access Cover .................... 7-58
Figure 7-49. Removing the Phy Modules Fan Tray Air Filter.......................... 7-59
Figure 7-50. Inserting the Phy Module Fan Tray Filter .................................... 7-60
Figure 8-1. Node Processor Module 2 (NP2).................................................... 8-1
Figure 8-2. SwitchOver Dialog Box ................................................................. 8-3
Figure 8-3. Set Card Attributes Dialog Box (NP)............................................. 8-5
Figure 8-4. View Card Attributes Dialog Box (NP) ......................................... 8-9
Figure 9-1. ESD Grounding Jacks on GX 550 Switch.................................... 9-6
Figure 10-1. DIP Switches on Node Processor Module.................................... 10-2
Figure 10-2. DIP Switches on BIO Module...................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-3. NP Module’s Switch and Status LEDs......................................... 10-6
Figure 10-4. BIO Module LEDs ....................................................................... 10-8
Figure A-1. ATM Base Input/Output Module .................................................. A-4

xxii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Figure A-2. BIO2 Module - Front View............................................................ A-7


Figure A-3. Node Processor Module (NP1) ...................................................... A-9
Figure A-4. Node Processor Module 2 (NP2) ................................................... A-9
Figure A-5. Switch Fabric Module.................................................................. A-11
Figure A-6. OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module.......................................................... A-15
Figure A-7. OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module........................................................ A-19
Figure A-8. OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module ....................................................... A-23
Figure A-9. GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module ............................................. A-26
Figure A-10. Node Processor Adapter Module ................................................. A-28
Figure A-11. Timing Module ............................................................................ A-30
Figure A-12. SF/NP Fan Tray ........................................................................... A-32
Figure A-13. BIO Fan Tray ............................................................................... A-33
Figure A-14. Phy Modules Fan Tray................................................................. A-34
Figure A-15. Timing Module/NPA Fan Tray.................................................... A-36
Figure B-1. Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable with
9-pin to 25-pin Adapter.................................................................. B-3
Figure B-2. Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable ............. B-5
Figure B-3. DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable .................................... B-7
Figure B-4. RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Cable.......................................... B-9
Figure B-5. MPK Null Modem Converter ...................................................... B-11
Figure B-6. NET MGMT Connector on NPA Module ................................... B-13
Figure B-7. EXT PWR ALARM Connector on NPA Module........................ B-15
Figure B-8. Diagnostics Ports on BIO1 and NP1 Modules............................. B-17
Figure B-9. Diagnostics Port on BIO2 and NP2 Modules .............................. B-19
Figure B-10. Multimode Fiber Cable ................................................................ B-20
Figure D-1. Redundant NP and SF Modules (front) ......................................... D-2
Figure D-2. Redundant Timing Modules (rear)................................................. D-3
Figure D-3. StnBy LED for an NP Module....................................................... D-8
Figure D-4. StnBy LED for the SF Module ...................................................... D-9
Figure D-5. StnBy LED for the Timing Module ............................................... D-9
Figure E-1. The Fiber Cable Management Tray ............................................... E-2
Figure E-2. Mounting Holes on the GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch......... E-4
Figure E-3. Attaching the Fiber Cable Management Tray to the GX 550........ E-5
Figure E-4. Threading Fiber-optic Cables in the Tray...................................... E-7

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxiii


Contents

List of Tables
Table 1-1. BIO/Phy Module Interfaces............................................................ 1-7
Table 2-1. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Electronic/Electrical
Specifications ................................................................................. 2-2
Table 2-2. DCPPU LEDs............................................................................... 2-10
Table 2-3. External Power Alarm Signals ..................................................... 2-11
Table 2-4. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Physical Specifications ....... 2-12
Table 2-5. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Site Specifications............... 2-13
Table 4-1. GX 550 Bracket Accessory Kit Product Codes.............................. 4-3
Table 4-2. Remote Alarm Signal Pinouts ...................................................... 4-24
Table 5-1. GX 550 Power Connection Methods.............................................. 5-2
Table 6-1. Switch Status LEDs on NP Module ............................................... 6-7
Table 6-2. Module Status LEDs on NP and BIO Modules.............................. 6-8
Table 6-3. NP and BIO Module Status LEDs During the Boot Process.......... 6-8
Table 6-4. Module Status LEDs on SF and Timing Modules........................ 6-10
Table 6-5. Module Status LEDs on Phy Modules ......................................... 6-11
Table 6-6. Port Alarm LEDs.......................................................................... 6-14
Table 6-7. StnBy LED on the NP .................................................................. 6-15
Table 6-8. StnBy LEDs on the SF and Timing Modules............................... 6-16
Table 6-9. Fan Tray LEDs ............................................................................. 6-17
Table 8-1. Set Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP) .................................. 8-5
Table 8-2. View Card Attributes Dialog Box Buttons (NP).......................... 8-10
Table 8-3. View Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP)............................. 8-10
Table 9-1. Set Card Attributes Fields (NP Module) ...................................... 9-25
Table 10-1. DIP Switch Settings...................................................................... 10-4
Table 10-2. Switch Troubleshooting................................................................ 10-5
Table 10-3. BIO Module Troubleshooting ...................................................... 10-7
Table B-1. Pinouts – Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub
Diagnostic Cable with 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter ............................ B-2
Table B-2. Pinouts – Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub
Diagnostic Cable ........................................................................... B-4
Table B-3. Pinouts – DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable.................... B-6
Table B-4. Pinouts – RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic Cable....... B-8
Table B-5. Pinouts – MPK Null Modem Converter...................................... B-10
Table B-6. Pinouts – NET MGMT Connector on NPA Module................... B-12
Table B-7. Pinouts – EXT PWR ALARM Connector on NPA Module ....... B-14

xxiv8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Contents

Table B-8. Pinouts – Diagnostics Port Connector on BIO1 and NP1


Modules........................................................................................ B-16
Table B-9. Pinouts – RJ-45 Serial Interface .................................................. B-18
Table D-1. StnBy LED on an NP Module ....................................................... D-8
Table D-2. StnBy LEDs for the SF and Timing Modules................................ D-9

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxv


Contents

xxvi8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

About This Guide


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide describes how to
install and set up the GX 550® Multiservice WAN switch hardware, replace hardware
modules, and interpret LED status indicators. This guide also provides basic
troubleshooting solutions for potential hardware-related problems.

This guide is intended for network operations staff, systems integrators, and other
qualified service personnel responsible for installing the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch.

What You Need to Know


The procedures in this guide require you to understand and follow the safety practices
at your site, as well as those identified in this guide. The procedures also require you
to understand the temperature, humidity, and electrical requirements for the
installation site, which are described in Chapter 2, “Specifications and Safety
Warnings.”

You must also understand the switch’s position in the overall network design before
you can connect the switch to a network. You should work closely with the Network
Management Station (NMS) operator and other systems integration personnel to
ensure a functional installation.

Be sure to read the software release notice (SRN) that accompanies this product.
The SRN contains the most current product information and requirements.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide xxvii


About This Guide
Beta Draft Confidential

Reading Path
Use the following guides to install and manage the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch.
This guide describes how to install and set up the
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch hardware,
replace hardware modules, and interpret LED
status indicators.
GX 550
Multiservice WAN
Switch Hardware
Installation Guide

These guides describe how to install NavisCore


network management software and supporting
applications on the Network Management Station
(NMS). You manage a GX 550 switch through the
Network NMS NavisCore software.
Management
Station Installation
and Upgrade
Guides

This guide describes how to configure and


manage NavisCore, network maps, and Lucent
switches. It also describes how to add third-party
objects to the map and access them through
Getting Started NavisCore.
User’s Guide

This guide describes the processor and


input/output modules (IOMs) on the switch, and
the configuration of physical ports, timing, and
other attributes through NavisCore.
Switch Module
Configuration
Guide

xxviii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential About This Guide

Documentation for New Modules


The following guides provide information about hardware installation and switch
software configuration for specific modules.
• CBX 1-Port Channelized STM-1/E1 IMA I/O Module User’s Guide
• GX BIO-C, OC-48c/STM-16c, and SF2 Modules User’s Guide

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxix


About This Guide
Beta Draft Confidential

How to Use This Guide


This guide contains the following information:

Read To Learn About

Chapter 1 The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch, its features, and its modules.

Chapter 2 Product specifications for the GX 550 hardware, including


environmental and electrical information or requirements. This chapter
also lists the safety warnings for using GX 550 hardware.

Chapter 3 Installation prerequisites, such as unpacking the unit, moving the


switch to the installation site, and verifying the hardware
configuration.

Chapter 4 Setting up and installing the GX 550 hardware.

Chapter 5 Connecting power to the switch and powering up the switch.

Chapter 6 Determining the operating status of the switch and its modules.

Chapter 7 Installing or replacing modules in a GX 550 Multiservice WAN


switch.

Chapter 8 The NP2 node processor and the enhanced functionality that this
module provides over NP or NP1 modules.

Chapter 9 Upgrading the Node Processor (NP or NP1) to an NP2 module.

Chapter 10 Determining hardware operational status and performing basic


troubleshooting procedures. This chapter also includes
customer-support contact information (Technical Assistance Center).

Appendix A The hardware modules available for the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch.

Appendix B The GX 550 cables and their pinout assignments.

Appendix C Country-specific regulatory information, including recommendations


and mandatory requirements by certification authorities, and
environmental standards and compliance information

xxx8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential About This Guide

Read To Learn About

Appendix D GX 550 redundancy features.

Appendix E Fiber cable management.

What’s New in This Guide?


The following table lists the latest enhancements and changes to this guide.

Feature Description See


or
Enhancement

Information Merged from the Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2)


Module User’s Guide

BIO2 Module • Merged information from the Base page 1-6


Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module page 3-9
User’s Guide into this guide. page 6-3
page A-5
page B-18

Information Merged from the GX 550 NP Upgrade Method of Procedure

NP2 Upgrade Process • Merged information from the GX Chapter 8


550 NP Upgrade Method of
Procedure into this guide.

General Enhancements

GX 550® ES Downlink • Merged information from the page A-24


Phy Module Documentation Updates section of
the CBX Release 08.03.00.02
Software Release Notes (SRN).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxxi


About This Guide
Beta Draft Confidential

Feature Description See


or
Enhancement

Air filters Added a note to indicate that air page 7-44


filters must be vacuumed or
replaced once a month to prevent
heat from building up inside the
chassis.

xxxii8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential About This Guide

Conventions
This guide uses the following conventions, when applicable:

Convention Indicates Example

Courier Regular System output, filenames, Please wait...


and command names.

Courier Bold User input. > show ospf names

Menu Ÿ Option A selection from a menu. NavisCore Ÿ Logon

Italics Book titles, new terms, and B-STDX, CBX, and GX


emphasized text. Network Management
Station Installation Guide

A box around text A note, caution, or warning. See examples below.

Note – Notes provide additional information or helpful suggestions that may apply
to the subject text.

Caution – Cautions notify the reader to proceed carefully to avoid possible


! equipment damage or data loss, or personal injury.

Warning – Warnings notify the reader to proceed carefully to avoid hazards due to
electrical shock that may arise from dangerous voltages.

Warning – Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Susceptibility warnings indicate that the


following procedures may make the device susceptible to electrostatic charge.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxxiii


About This Guide
Beta Draft Confidential

Related Documents
This section lists the related Lucent and third-party documentation that may be helpful
to read.

Lucent
• Reading Roadmap
• B-STDX, CBX, and GX Network Management Station Installation Guide (for
NavisCore Release 09.00.00.00) (Product Code: 80200)
• B-STDX, CBX, and GX Getting Started Guide (Product Code: 80195)
• B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide (Product Code:
80196)
• CBX and GX Switch Software Upgrade Guide (Product Code: 80198)
• B-STDX, CBX, and GX ATM Services Configuration Guide (Product Code:
80191)
• B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Diagnostics User’s Guide (Product Code: 80192)
• B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Troubleshooting Guide (Product Code: 80197)

All manuals for the Core Switching Division and the Master Glossary are available on
the Core Switching Division Technical Publications Documentation Library
CD-ROM (Product Code: 80025).

xxxiv8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential About This Guide

Ordering Printed Manuals Online


You can order Core Switching manuals online. Use the following URL to access the
Lucent Bookstore:

http://www.lucentdocs.com

Customer Comments
Customer comments are welcome. Please respond in one of the following ways:
• Fill out the Customer Comment Form located at the back of this guide and return
it to us.
• E-mail your comments to cspubs@lucent.com
• FAX your comments to 978-692-1510, attention Technical Publications.

Technical Support
The Lucent Technical Assistance Center (TAC) is available to assist you with any
problems encountered while using this Lucent product. Log on to our Customer
Support web site to obtain telephone numbers for the Lucent TAC in your region:

http://www.lucent.com/support

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04xxxv


About This Guide
Beta Draft Confidential

xxxvi8/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

1
Overview
This overview chapter includes the following topics about the GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch:
• GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Description
• GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Features
• Hardware Module Descriptions

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Description


The GX 550 is a scalable, high-capacity (25 Gbps) ATM switch that provides the
capacity, performance, and fan-out capabilities required by carrier services. It delivers
high-port densities of OC-3/STM-1 and OC-12/STM-4 interfaces, with
OC-48/STM-16 high-speed trunking. The following GX 550 high-availability features
are required at the network core, and provide carrier class networks with the resiliency
needed for network integrity:
• Lossless fabric switchover
• Port redundancy using 1+1 Automatic Protection Switching
• Line-card redundancy
• Holdover timing
• Extensive port and circuit statistics

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/041-1


Overview
Beta Draft Confidential
GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Description

ATM quality of service (QoS) is guaranteed end-to-end throughout Lucent's family of


switches with the GX 550’s Enhanced QuadPlane architecture and Virtual Network
Navigator (VNN), Lucent's ATM enhanced routing protocol.

The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch supports a full suite of standards, including:
• User-Network Interface (UNI 3.0, UNI 3.1, or UNI 4.0)
• Interim Inter-switch Signaling Protocol (IISP)
• Private Network Node Interface (PNNI)
• Broadband Inter-Carrier Interface (B-ICI)
• Traffic Management 4.0 (TM 4.0)

These standards, combined with guaranteed QoS and carrier class availability, provide
service providers with the industry's preeminent high-speed core switch designed for
intelligent switching.

1-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Overview
GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Features

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Features


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch provides the following features:
• 25 Gbps nonblocking ATM switching capacity
• 56-slot modular architecture
• Dual -48V/-60V DC power entries
• Hot-swappable components
• Fully redundant switch fabric module, node processor module, and timing module
• Fully distributed power conversion
• Industry-leading port density options: 156 OC-3c/STM-1, 39 OC-12c/STM-4, or
9 OC-48/STM-16 ports in one 25 Gbps platform (or combinations of these ports)
• Capability to add additional ports (supporting lower speed ATM interfaces) via
the GX 550 ES (Extender Shelf).

Hardware Module Descriptions


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch includes the following types of modules:
• Base Input/Output Modules
• Switch Fabric Module
• Node Processor Module
• OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules
• GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module
• Node Processor Adapter Module
• Timing Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/041-3


Overview
Beta Draft Confidential
Hardware Module Descriptions

Module Locations
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the locations of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
modules.
Node Processing
Modules (slots 1
and 2)

Node Processor

BIO modules
Diag. Port Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Fan Status
Fan Tray
No. 3

Switch Fabric
Modules (slots 1A
and 1B) Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Fan Status /Fan Tray No. 4

Slot 3 Slot 12

Figure 1-1. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch - Front View

1-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Overview
Hardware Module Descriptions

Timing Modules
(slots 1C and 1D)

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Node Processor
Adapter Module
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Slots 3A – 3D
Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Slot 12A Rx

Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx

Tx 4

Slot 12C Rx
OC3
STM1
PHY
MM
OC12
STM4
PHY
MM
OC12
STM4
PHY
MM

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx

Tx 2

Slot 12B Rx

Tx 3
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Rx

Tx 4

Slot 12D Rx
OC3
STM1
PHY
OC48
STM16
PHY
OC12
STM4
PHY
OC48
STM16
PHY
OC48
STM16
PHY
OC48
STM16
PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Fan Fault

Phy Modules

Figure 1-2. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch - Rear View

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/041-5


Overview
Beta Draft Confidential
Hardware Module Descriptions

Base Input/Output Modules


The ATM base input/output (BIO1 or BIO2) modules provide ATM layer processing
for four independent 622 Mbps cell threads. Each BIO thread interfaces cells to or
from a physical interface (phy) module and to or from the switching fabric port. A phy
module may be a quad OC-3c/STM-1 or a single OC-12c/STM-4 module on a
per-thread basis, or an OC-48/STM-16 module on a per-BIO basis.

The BIO2 module includes all features of the BIO1 module, and the following
enhancements:
• Increased call handling performance.
• Explicit forward congestion indication (EFCI) marking on the cell header, which,
when set, enables congestion control on a per-virtual circuit (VC) basis.
• Traffic management features.

Number of Supported Modules

There can be up to 10 BIO modules on a GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch chassis.


On switch software versions that support the BIO2 module, BIO1 and BIO2 modules
fully interoperate on the same switch. The BIO modules are located vertically on the
front of the chassis (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-4). Slots that are not occupied by
modules are masked with blank covers to ensure proper air flow through the switch.

A BIO module can be placed within slots 3 through 12 and must be installed before
the phy modules connected to a BIO module in a particular slot (at the rear of the
switch) can be active. See Chapter 7, “Removing and Installing Components,” for
more information about the phy modules that can be connected to a BIO2 module.

Interfaces to Switch Fabric

The BIO module interfaces to the switch fabric (SF) module via a connector to the
backplane. The BIO interfaces its four cell-processing threads to four ports of the SF.

1-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Overview
Hardware Module Descriptions

Interfaces to Physical Interface Modules

The BIO module interfaces to a variety of phy modules via a connector on the
backplane. Table 1-1 describes the interfaces for a BIO module.
Table 1-1. BIO/Phy Module Interfaces

Phy Module Port Speed Maximum Port Port Capacity


Number of Capacity per BIO
Phy Modules per Phy Module
per BIO Module

OC-3c/STM-1 155.54 Mbps 4 4 ports 16 ports

OC-12c/STM-4 622.08 Mbps 4 1 port 4 ports

OC-48/STM-16 2.488 Gbps 1 1 port 1 port

GX 550 ES downlink 1.0368 Gbps 4 1 port 4 ports

Switch Fabric Module


The switch fabric (SF) module provides non-blocked, source-routed cell switching of
up to 25 Gbps.

Number of Supported Modules

There can be one or two SF modules in a GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch chassis.
The SF can operate correctly with one or two SFs, one or two NPs, one or two timing
modules, and 0 to 10 BIOs (BIO1s or BIO2s) installed. There is no SF adapter module
in the GX 550.

The SF modules are located in the front of the chassis in the third and fourth slots from
the top (see Figure 1-1 on page 1-4). The second SF module is a redundant SF unit. If
the active SF module fails, the redundant SF module becomes the active SF without
disrupting working services.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/041-7


Overview
Beta Draft Confidential
Hardware Module Descriptions

Node Processor Module


The Node Processor (NP1 or NP2) module provides system control and management.
See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for information about the NP2.

Number of Supported Modules

There can be one or two NP modules in a GX 550 chassis. The NP modules are
located in the two top slots of the front chassis and are oriented horizontally
(see Figure 1-1 on page 1-4).

The second NP module serves as a redundant unit. If the active NP module fails, the
redundant NP module becomes the active NP without disrupting working services.

Cell Thread Interface

The Cell Thread Interface connects both NPs to a single port of the SF (Port #40).
This fabric port is not shared with an I/O module. Each NP is connected to both SF1
and SF2 for redundancy.

1-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Overview
Hardware Module Descriptions

OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules


The OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 phy modules are physical
layer cards that provide the SONET/SDH ATM interface to the BIO modules.
The phy modules provide the physical media dependent (PMD) and Transmission
Convergence (TC) sublayer functionality prior to the ATM layer processing
performed by the BIO module. The phy module contains the optics, framing, and
timing-generation functions unique to the physical level that it supports. The BIO
controls all of the BIO/phy module interfacing.

Number of Supported Modules

The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch chassis has 39 slots for phy modules at the rear
of the chassis (see Figure 1-2 on page 1-5). Slots 3A through 12C can each hold an
OC-3c/STM-1 or an OC-12c/STM-4 module. An OC-48/STM-16 module occupies
four slots (for example, slots 3A – 3D).

Slot 12D cannot hold an OC-3c/STM-1 or an OC-12c/STM-4 module, and slots


12A – 12D cannot hold an OC-48/STM-16 module.

Automatic Protection Switching Redundancy

The phy modules support Automatic Protection Switching (APS). The K1/K2 bytes of
the SONET/SDH framing overhead are monitored and accessed by the software to
provide an automated switching mechanism for rerouting traffic from a failed link to a
protection facility. The protection, 1+1 Protected Linear Network, is described in
Bellcore GR-253-CORE. The redundancy mechanism between the active and
protection ports is provided through software, across phy modules. See the B-STDX,
CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide for more details regarding the APS
features that each GX 550 module supports.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/041-9


Overview
Beta Draft Confidential
Hardware Module Descriptions

GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

Note – Read the applicable GX 550 switch software release notice (SRN) to
determine whether the GX 550 ES is supported in your current release.

The GX 550 ES downlink phy module is a physical layer card that interfaces to the
BIO module. The downlink phy module extends the physical layer function of the
GX 550 phy interface to the GX 550 ES via a standard multimode fiber cable,
controlling cell flow, timing, and fault monitoring for the GX 550 ES.

The downlink phy module supports ATM traffic on a single thread of 622 Mbps per
user, over a 1.0368 GB interface.

Number of Supported Modules

You can connect up to four downlink phy modules to each BIO (BIO1 or BIO2)
module in a GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch. Each downlink phy module must be
installed with a supporting BIO module in the corresponding slot at the front of the
GX 550.

Interfaces with Other Modules

The GX 550 ES downlink phy module interfaces via a standard multimode fiber cable
to the uplink phy module (installed at the rear of GX 550 ES).

For more information about the GX 550 ES, see the GX 550 ES Hardware Installation
Guide.

Node Processor Adapter Module


The node processor adapter (NPA) module provides input/output connections to the
node processor module and the timing module.

1-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Overview
Hardware Module Descriptions

Number of Supported Modules

There is one NPA module in a GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch chassis. The NPA
module is located in the rear of the chassis, third slot from the top, and is oriented
horizontally (see Figure 1-2 on page 1-5).

Timing Module
The timing module contains the centralized phy timing sources for the system, and
distributes a timing (master) clock to the physical ports on the backplane. The
BIO/phy modules derive physical timing appropriate for the transmission interface
from the timing clock. In addition, the timing module provides timing to synchronize
data across the backplane.

The timing module also provides 24V power to the chassis fans.

Caution – If the switch is powered up without a timing module installed, the cooling
! fans will not operate and the equipment can be damaged from overheating. Do not
power up the switch unless a timing module is installed.

Caution – When latching down the timing module, you will lose timing even though
! the fans are still operating.

Number of Supported Modules

There can be up to two timing modules in the chassis. The timing module is located in
the rear of the chassis in the first and second slots from the top (see Figure 1-2 on
page 1-5).

The second timing module serves as a redundant unit. If the active timing module
fails, the redundant timing module becomes the active timing module without
disrupting working services.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/041-11


Overview
Beta Draft Confidential
Hardware Module Descriptions

1-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

2
Specifications and Safety Warnings
This chapter describes the following specifications and safety warnings for the
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch:
• Electronic/Electrical Requirements
• Physical Specifications
• Site Specifications
• DC Power Supply Warnings
• Safety Warnings

Electronic/Electrical Requirements
The following sections describe the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch’s electronic
and electrical requirements:

Power Specifications
The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch requires -48 or -60 VDC power, as specified
in Table 2-1 on page 2-2. If you have an AC power source, use a rectifier to convert
AC-to-DC power (see “AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit” on page 2-3).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-1


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

Table 2-1. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Electronic/Electrical


Specifications

Application Specification

-48 VDC 63 amps max, 3,000 watts max

-60 VDC 50 amps max, 3,000 watts max

Note – The maximum power dissipation is 3,000 watts. The actual power dissipation
varies, depending on the configuration of your switch, so the switch may draw less
current than the values listed in Table 2-1.

Wiring Size
The actual input voltage for a GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch can range from
-40 to -72 VDC, with a maximum input current of 75 amps. You must ensure that the
wire size is adequate for the current rating, and that the voltage drop anticipated in the
installation complies with locally applicable codes.

Transient Power Protection for DC Power Sources


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch is NEBS compliant (Bellcore GR-1089 and
GR-63), supporting 0 – 200V transients for up to one microsecond. However, if you
are using a DC power source, power drops can cause the switch to reboot, and many
Lucent customers have transient specification requirements that are greater than that
of Bellcore. You can provide additional “ride-through” time and greater protection
from transients by using a DC input power protection unit (DCPPU). See “DC Input
Power Protection Unit (DCPPU)” on page 2-4 for more information.

If you are using an AC power source, you do not need to use a DCPPU because the
rectifier has built-in transient protection (see “AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit” on page 2-3).

2-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch requires DC power. If you do not have a
DC power source, use an AC-to-DC rectifier to provide DC power to the switch.

AC-to-DC Rectifier Required Features

Use an AC-to-DC rectifier that has the following features:


• Converts 240 VAC or 120 VAC standard power to 56 VDC
• Provides up to 3,000 watts of DC power from multiple standard branch circuits
• Allows hot-swapping of converter modules, so no maintenance shutdown is
needed
• Derives power from standard branch circuits and provides auto-ranging and
power factor correction
• Allows ride-through time of 10 ms (milliseconds) for momentary line drop
transients
• Has worldwide regulatory approvals for safety and EMI

Ordering an AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit

Contact your Lucent Account Manager for the name of an approved AC-to-DC
rectifier. See the section, “AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit” in Appendix A, for a description
of the AC-to-DC rectifier that you can purchase from Lucent.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-3


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

DC Input Power Protection Unit (DCPPU)


GX 550 Multiservice WAN switches do not have power supplies; instead, native DC
inputs (A and B) are fed into the switch, and power is distributed to each line card via
the backplane. If you are using an AC power source, you do not need to use a DCPPU
because the AC-to-DC rectifier has built-in transient protection
(see “AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit” on page 2-3).

The DCPPU (see Figure 2-1) provides the GX 550 with protection from transients,
and additional “ride-through” time when the switch is connected to a DC power
source. A transient event occurs when equipment connected to the same two DC
power feeds has a line-to-return short circuit, and has diode-isolation between the A
and B power feeds. This will short both A and B feeds simultaneously, causing a short
drop in both 48V feeds, which is often followed by an over-voltage transient. This
transient can cause the switch to reboot, resulting in several minutes of downtime.

The primary application for the DCPPU is in central office installations with
multi-vendor settings, where additional protection from fuse-clearing transient events
may be needed.

ON FLT A K ON FLT A K
I I
O O
TEST POINTS TEST POINTS
DC POWER PROTECTION UNIT TDI P/N 129620-1 DC POWER PROTECTION UNIT TDI P/N 129620-1

Rotary Latch Knob

Figure 2-1. DCPPU Front View - Dual Configuration

2-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

DCPPU Features

The DCPPU unit consists of two power modules, cabling for feed A and feed B, and
an external power alarm connector status cable (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-9).
The DCPPU has the following features:
• Return-lead diode isolation between 48V return A and 48V return B to prevent
circulating currents otherwise caused by unbalanced loading or wiring between
A and B feeds
• Isolation from fuse-clearing transient events and other transients that may occur
externally to the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
• Energy storage, up to five-millisecond ride-through time from 48V input dropout
(also referred to as a zero-voltage transient)
• Input line fuse to supplement the branch circuit breaker for line-to-line faults in
either the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch or the DCPPU
• Compliance with AT&T spec 802-010-100
• Convection cooling
• Operational status reports that are sent to NMS
• 19- or 23-inch rack mount capability
• Maintenance On/Off toggle button for each set of power connectors (A and B) —
this button is recessed, labeled as 1/0, and is located to the right of the FLT (fault)
LED (see Figure 2-2 on page 2-6)

Caution – There are no user-serviceable components (for example, replaceable fuses)


! in the DCPPU.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-5


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

DCPPU Front Panel

Figure 2-2 illustrates the DCPPU front panel area below the handle, near the bottom of
the unit.

On/Off button
(recessed)

ON FLT 1 A K
0
TEST POINTS
Rotary Latch knob

Figure 2-2. DCPPU Front Panel

Refer to the following sections for more information about the DCPPU front panel
features:
• See Table 2-2, “DCPPU LEDs,” on page 2-10 for descriptions of the ON and FLT
(fault) LEDs.
• See “Applying Power to the DCPPU” on page 2-10 for a description of the On/Off
toggle button.
• See “Test Points” on page 2-10 for a description of the A and K test points.

The rotary latch knob enables you to remove or insert a DCPPU unit. To remove the
unit, rotate the knob counterclockwise and then pull the DCPPU unit’s handle (shown
in Figure 2-1 on page 2-4). To verify that the unit is securely engaged, rotate the knob
clockwise and then pull the handle.

2-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

DCPPU Cabling

The input voltage for a DCPPU can range from -40 to -72 VDC, with a maximum
input current of 75 amperes. Select the appropriate cable thickness depending on the
distance between the connection points and the system configuration.

Lucent provides the following cables:


• DC power cables for connecting the output of the DCPPU to the input of the
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
• An external power alarm cable for connecting the DCPPU and the GX 550
(see “External Power Alarm Signals” on page 2-11 for signal descriptions and
pinout information)

The purchaser of the DCPPU must provide the following cables:


• DC power cables between the -48 VDC source and the inputs to the DCPPU
• Chassis ground cables

Note – Lucent recommends a two-hole lug (for example, a Panduit LDC4-14D) for
all grounding, return, and power stud connections.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-7


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

DCPPU Cable Installation

Refer to Figure 2-3 on page 2-9 while performing the following steps:
1. Verify that the correct power source is available (see the section, “Power
Specifications” on page 2-1).
2. Verify that the power is off or disconnected at the source.
3. With a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the protective cover over the power
terminals.
4. If necessary, terminate the power, return, and grounding wires in suitable listed
two-hole lugs (for example, Panduit LCD4-14D), using the tool recommended by
the manufacturer.
5. Using a 7/16-inch wrench or socket, remove the nut and washers from each of the
studs that you are going to connect to, including the chassis ground studs.
6. Install the lug from the grounding wire to the DCPPU chassis ground studs.
Lucent recommends that, to provide a single-point ground connection, only one of
the chassis grounds should be connected to earth ground. See the section,
“Connecting Power Cables to the Switch” in Chapter 5 for more information.
7. Install the -48 VDC source cables to the appropriate DCPPU input studs
(-48V INPUT and INPUT RETURN). There are two inputs: Feed A and Feed B.
Both feeds should be connected through separate sources to provide 1+1 input
redundancy.
8. Connect the output cables as follows:
a. Install the -48 VDC output cables to the appropriate DCPPU output studs
(-48V OUTPUT and OUTPUT RETURN).
b. Terminate the other ends at the GX 550.
c. Connect DCPPU output feed A to the GX 550 input feed A, and DCPPU
output feed B to the GX 550 input feed B. See the section, “Connecting Power
Cables to the Switch” in Chapter 5 for more information.
9. Reinstall the washers and nut onto each stud by using a 7/16-inch wrench or
socket to tighten each nut.
10. Reinstall the protective cover.

2-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

11. Insert the External Power Alarm cable through the hole in the protective cover,
installing it onto the appropriate connector on the DCPPU; connect the other end
of the cable to the EXT PWR ALARM connector on the Node Processor Adapter
at the rear of the GX 550 (see Figure 5-3 in Chapter 5). See also “External Power
Alarm Signals” on page 2-11 for specific pinout information.

Protective Cover

B J1 A
MONITOR
SIGNALS
INPUT
RETURN

–48V INPUT

OUTPUT RETURN

–48V OUTPUT

INPUT RETURN

–48V INPUT

OUTPUT RETURN

–48V OUTPUT

RTN of Feed A
RTN of Feed B
–VDC of Feed A
–VDC of Feed B
GX 550’s RTN power connection (Feed A)
GX 550’s RTN power connection (Feed B)
GX 550’s –48V power connection (Feed A)
GX 550’s –48V power connection (Feed B)
Building’s ground wire (but only if DCPPU’s
ground connection B is not connected)
EXT PWR ALARM connector
on Node Processor Adapter Building’s ground wire (but only if DCPPU’s
ground connection A is not connected)

Figure 2-3. DCPPU Rear View with Cable Connections

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-9


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

Applying Power to the DCPPU

Perform the following steps to apply power to the DCPPU:


1. Turn on the power source. The green ON LED is lit (see Figure 2-2 on page 2-6).
If the DCPPU is turned off, the red FLT (fault) LED is lit.
2. If the DCPPU is turned off, turn it on by inserting a small-diameter implement
such as a #0 Phillips-head screwdriver and pressing the recessed On/Off toggle
button (labeled as 1/0, and located to the right of the FLT (fault) LED). Do this for
each set of power connectors (A and B).

DCPPU Operating Status

Table 2-2 describes the DCPPU LEDs that are shown in Figure 2-2 on page 2-6.
Table 2-2. DCPPU LEDs

LED Status

ON (Green) There is input voltage to the DCPPU.

FLT (Red) There is no output voltage because the On/Off toggle button is in the
off position, or because there is a module fault.

Test Points

The front panel test points (A and K) (see Figure 2-2 on page 2-6) are for measuring
the voltage drop across the return isolation diode. The nominal reading is 0.6 volts.

2-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
Electronic/Electrical Requirements

External Power Alarm Signals

Table 2-3 describes the external power alarm signals.


Table 2-3. External Power Alarm Signals

Signal Description Pin

UNIT PRESENT Indicates to the GX 550 that the DCPPU is 5


connected

DC OK Indicates a failed module 6

DC UNIT Indicates that a DC unit is connected 7

SIGNAL RTN Reference point for the signals 1

Refer to Figure B-7 in Appendix B for pinout locations for the external power alarm
connector on an NPA module.

Space Requirements

Caution – Provide a minimum clearance of three inches above and below the DCPPU
! to prevent it from overheating.

Ordering a DCPPU

Contact your Lucent Account Manager for ordering information. See the section,
“DC Input Power Protection Unit” in Appendix A, for a description of the DCPPU
that you can purchase from Lucent.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-11


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Physical Specifications

Physical Specifications
Table 2-4 describes the physical specifications of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch.
Table 2-4. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Physical Specifications

Specification Description

ATM Standards ATM Forum UNI (Version 3.0, Version 3.1, Version 4.0),
ATM Forum Interim Inter-Switch Signaling Protocol
(IISP), Private Network Node Interface (PNNI),
Broadband Inter-Carrier Interface (B-ICI), Traffic
Management 4.0.

WAN Interfaces OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16.

Management Interfaces Ethernet, RS-232.

Physical Characteristics Switch includes node processor, switch fabric, base


input/output modules, node processor adapter, timing
module, physical interface (phy) modules, and four fan
trays mounted inside a chassis.

Overall Switch Chassis Sizea 17.68 in. (44.9 cm) wide x 37 in. (94cm) high
x 22 in. (55.9 cm) deep.

Switch Weight 180 lb. max (fully configured).


a
Depth size does not include calculations for cable spacing.

2-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
Site Specifications

Site Specifications
The following sections explain the site specifications for the GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch.

Operating Environment
Table 2-5 describes the environmental requirements for selecting a GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch hardware installation site. The site requirements are based
on Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) GR-63-CORE and
GR-1089-CORE.
Table 2-5. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Site Specifications

Parameter Requirement

Ambient Operating Temperature 0°C to +50°C

Relative Humidity 10% to 95% (noncondensing)

Operating Altitude to 10,000 ft (3050 m)

Ambient Storage Temperature -40°C to +65°C, 95% relative humidity

Storage Altitude -1,000 to +30,000 ft (-305 to 9150 m)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-13


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Site Specifications

Space Requirements
The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch hardware requires the following minimum
clearances for the chassis:
• 10 inches (25.4 cm) at the back panel (for cable routing)
• 20 inches (50.8 cm) at the front panel
• 3 inches (7.6 cm) of air flow space on both sides of the chassis
• For normal operations, no clearance is required on top of the switch chassis.
However, if on-site service of software problems is necessary and the node
processor module is installed in slot 1, there must be at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) of
clearance at the top of the switch chassis for accessing the i960 component on the
node processor.

2-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Specifications and Safety Warnings
DC Power Supply Warnings

DC Power Supply Warnings


Warning – The DC-powered GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch must be installed
only in restricted access areas (dedicated equipment rooms, equipment closets, or the
like) in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electric
Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Connect to a 48V DC source that is electrically isolated from
the AC source and that is reliably connected to earth.

This equipment is designed to permit the connection of the grounded conductor of the
DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment. If this connection is
made, all of the following conditions must be met:
• This equipment shall be connected directly to the DC supply system
grounding electrode conductor or bonding jumper from a grounding terminal
bar or bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is
connected.
• This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent
cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and
also the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system shall not be
grounded elsewhere.
• The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as the
equipment.
• There shall be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the
grounding electrode conductor.
• A readily accessible disconnect device must be provided in the fixed wiring
for a DC power supply. It must be suitable for the rated voltage and current
specified.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/042-15


Specifications and Safety Warnings
Beta Draft Confidential
Safety Warnings

Safety Warnings
Warning – There are mechanical and electrical shock hazards present throughout the
system if one or more of the modules is removed. There are no operator serviceable
components. Only qualified personnel are allowed to service the unit.

This equipment must be connected to a protective ground in accordance with the


instructions provided in this guide. Improper grounding may result in an electrical
shock.

Signes Précurseurs de Sécurité


Warning – Il y a danger de hasards mécaniques et de shocks électriques parmi le
système si un ou plusieurs modules sont enlevés. Il n'y a pas de parties constituantes
qui peuvent être entretenu. Seulement les techniciens qualifiés peuvent faire l'entretien
de ce système.

Il faut connecter cet équipement à une prise de terre protegée conformément aux
instructions fournis dans ce guide. Une prise de terre incorrecte résultera en
commotion électrique.

Achtung: Zusätzliche Sicherheitshinweise


Warning – Wenn ein oder mehrere Module entfernt werden, besteht die Gefahr
eines elektrischen Stromschlages oder Verletzung durch mechanische Elemente. Es
gibt keine vom Bediener zu wartenden Komponenten. Die Wartung darf nur vom
qualifizierten Fachpersonal vorgenommen werden.

2-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

3
Preparing for the Installation
This chapter describes the following prerequisite tasks for installing the GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch:
• Selecting the Installation Site
• Checking the Switch for Damage
• Moving the Switch to the Installation Site
• Unpacking the Switch
• Unpacking the Accessory Kit
• Verifying the Hardware Configuration

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/043-1


Preparing for the Installation
Beta Draft Confidential
Selecting the Installation Site

Selecting the Installation Site


Before you choose a setup location for the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch, you
must read and follow the electrical requirements and site specifications defined in the
following sections:
• “Electronic/Electrical Requirements” in Chapter 2
• “Site Specifications” in Chapter 2

You must select the setup location carefully because the switch requires proper
ventilation and space for current and future cabling requirements. Lucent recommends
that you rack-mount the switch, using one of the following methods:
• in a 19-inch (48.26 cm) wide equipment rack (ANSI/EIA-RS-310-C)
• in a 23-inch (58.42 cm) wide equipment rack (Telco or ANSI/EIA-RS-310-C)

For more information about rack-mounting, refer to the section, “Setting Up as a


Rack-mounted Switch” in Chapter 4.

3-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Preparing for the Installation
Checking the Switch for Damage

Checking the Switch for Damage


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch is delivered in a protective shipping carton.
The switch chassis is attached to a wooden pallet with screws and L-brackets
(see Figure 3-1). Do not remove the carton. Check the carton and pallet for damage.
If there is any damage, follow the instructions in the section, “If the Product Is
Damaged” in the hardware warranty.

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Figure 3-1. GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Shipment

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/043-3


Preparing for the Installation
Beta Draft Confidential
Moving the Switch to the Installation Site

Moving the Switch to the Installation Site


Due to the large size and weight of a fully configured switch, Lucent recommends that
you move the switch to the installation site before unpacking it from the shipping
carton.

Unpacking the Switch


Caution – A fully configured switch weighs up to 200 pounds. To avoid potential
! injury, use a hand lift for moving or rack-mounting the switch.

To unpack the switch:


1. Open the carton and remove all enclosed packing materials from the shipping
carton. Save the packing materials for repacking the switch later, if necessary.
2. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the screws from the L-brackets on
the delivery pallet (see Figure 3-1 on page 3-3).
3. Carefully remove the switch from the pallet.

3-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Preparing for the Installation
Unpacking the Accessory Kit

Unpacking the Accessory Kit


The items in the accessory kit vary with each order. Unpack the accessory kit and
check the contents, using the items listed on the packing slip.

The following required items are shipped in the accessory kit of each GX 550 order:
• Two shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub diagnostic cables
• DB-25 to DB-9 Shielded Crossover Cable
• Antistatic wrist strap
• Packet of installation hardware
• 9-pin to 25-pin adapter
• DB-26 to 18 terminal block adapter
• GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide,
Product code: 80077
• Core Switching Technical Publications Documentation Library CD,
Product code: 80025
• Reading Roadmap, Product code: 80113

The following optional accessory items are shipped as required by the order:
• NavisCore (network management software for UNIX) and associated
documentation
• Physical interface (phy) module-specific cables (fiber-optic)

Note – Although a torque driver is not supplied in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch accessory kit, it is recommended that, when tightening thumbscrews with a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, a maximum of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque should be used.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/043-5


Preparing for the Installation
Beta Draft Confidential
Verifying the Hardware Configuration

Verifying the Hardware Configuration


The modules ordered with the switch are installed prior to shipment. Check the switch
to verify that it is configured as ordered.

Before Handling Equipment

Warning – Static electricity can damage the equipment. Wear an antistatic strap when
handling any of the switch components.

Before handling any of the switch components, attach the antistatic wrist strap
(provided in the accessory kit) to your wrist and connect the plug-end to the grounding
jack located on the front or back of the switch (see Figure 3-2).

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125
Good
Failed
StnBy

Good
Failed
StnBy

T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Good
Fail

Front
Rear

Figure 3-2. ESD Grounding Jacks on GX 550 Switch

3-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Preparing for the Installation
Verifying the Hardware Configuration

Checking the Node Processor and Switch Fabric Modules


The node processor (NP) and switch fabric (SF) modules are located behind the
cosmetic bezel at the top front of the switch. Grasp the edges of the bezel and pull on
it to remove it (see Figure 3-3).

See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for information about the NP2. It is the
same size as the original NP (or, NP1), and it is installed and removed in the same way
as the NP1.

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor
Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 3-3. Front Bezel Removal

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/043-7


Preparing for the Installation
Beta Draft Confidential
Verifying the Hardware Configuration

Figure 3-4 shows the upper front of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and an
example configuration that includes a redundant NP module and a redundant SF
module. Verify that slots 1 and 2 contain the number of NP modules that you ordered,
and that slots 1A and 1B contain the number of SF modules that you ordered. There
must be at least one NP and one SF installed.
Node Processing
Modules (slots 1
and 2)

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Fan Status
Fan Tray
No. 3

Switch Fabric Good


Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed

Modules (slots 1A
and 1B)
Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms
Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

Figure 3-4. Node Processor and Switch Fabric Locations (front)

3-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Preparing for the Installation
Verifying the Hardware Configuration

Checking the Base Input/Output Modules


Figure 3-5 shows the front of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and an example
configuration of base input/output (BIO) modules. Verify that slots 3 through 12
contain the number of BIO modules (BIO1s or BIO2s) that you ordered. A BIO
module must be installed in a slot before the physical ports in the corresponding slots
at the rear of the switch can be active.

Slots that are not occupied by modules are masked with blank covers to ensure proper
air flow through the switch.
Good
Failed
StnBy

BIO modules
Fan Status
Fan Tray
No. 3

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Fan Status /Fan Tray No. 4

Slot 3 Slot 12

Figure 3-5. BIO Module Locations (front)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/043-9


Preparing for the Installation
Beta Draft Confidential
Verifying the Hardware Configuration

Checking the Phy Modules


Figure 3-6 on page 3-11 shows the rear of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and
an example configuration of phy modules. Verify that slots 3A through 12C contain
the number and types of phy modules that you ordered. An OC-3c/STM-1,
OC-12c/STM-4, or a GX 550 ES downlink phy module occupies one slot, and an
OC-48/STM-16 phy module occupies four slots (for example, slots 7A – 7D).

Slot 12D cannot hold an OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, or GX 550 ES downlink phy


module. Slots 12A – 12D cannot hold an OC-48/STM-16 phy module.

A phy module’s ports cannot be active unless a BIO module (BIO1 or BIO2) is
installed in the corresponding slot in the front of the switch.

Slots that are not occupied by modules are masked with blank covers to ensure proper
air flow through the switch.

3-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Preparing for the Installation
Verifying the Hardware Configuration

Status

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Slot 12A Rx

Tx 4

Rx
Slots 3A – 3D
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4

Slot 12C PHY


MM
PHY
MM
PHY
MM

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Slot 12B Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Slot 12D
Fan Fault

Phy Modules

Figure 3-6. Phy Module Locations (rear)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/043-11


Preparing for the Installation
Beta Draft Confidential
What’s Next?

Checking the Node Processor Adapter and Timing


Modules
Figure 3-7 shows the upper rear of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and an
example configuration that includes the node processor adapter (NPA) and a
redundant timing module. Verify that the slot marked “NPA” contains the NPA, and
that slots 1C and 1D contain the number of timing modules that you ordered. One
NPA and at least one timing module must be installed.

Caution – If the switch is powered up and does not contain a timing module, the
! cooling fans will not operate and the equipment can be damaged from overheating. Do
not power up the switch unless a timing module is installed.

Timing Modules
(slots 1C and 1D)

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Node Processor
Adapter Module
Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Figure 3-7. Node Processor Adapter and Timing Module Locations


(rear)

What’s Next?
When you finish unpacking, taking inventory of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch hardware and the accessory kit, and checking the installed modules, you can
install the switch. Proceed to Chapter 4, “Installing the GX 550.”

3-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

4
Installing the GX 550
This chapter provides the following step-by-step instructions for setting up and
installing the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch:
• Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch
• Connecting Cables to the Switch
• Connecting the Switch to the NMS
• External T1 Clock Source Connection
• External E1 Clock Source Connection
• Remote Alarm Connection

Before You Begin


Before you begin, verify that the following tasks (mostly from Chapter 3) are
complete:
1. Selecting the installation site (see page 3-2)
2. Unpacking the switch (see page 3-4)
3. Unpacking the accessory kit (see page 3-5)
4. Verifying the module configuration in the switch (see page 3-6)
5. Gathering the tools and equipment needed for installation (see page 4-2)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-1


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Required Installation Tools and Equipment

Required Installation Tools and Equipment


To install the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch hardware, you need the following
tools and equipment:
• An ASCII/VT100 console terminal or equivalent that runs at 19,200 bps and can
download software by using terminal emulation software.
• A shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub diagnostic cable (included in the
accessory kit) for connecting the console to the switch.
• A 9-pin to 25-pin adapter (included in the accessory kit) if you are using a
SPARCstation as the console.
• A DB-9 to DB-25 shielded crossover cable (included in the accessory kit) for
connecting a modem dial-up link to the switch.
• An antistatic wrist strap (included in the accessory kit).
• A #2 Phillips-head screwdriver.
• A 1/8-in. and a 3/16-in. flathead screwdriver.
• A wire-wrap gun (required only for T1 clock input or output connections).
• A 7/16-in. wrench or socket.
• A hand lift (recommended).
• (Optional) An Ethernet transceiver or LAN connection for connecting the switch
to the NMS. This is only required if the switch is connected directly to the NMS
(i.e., the gateway switch).
• The correct bracket accessory kit

Bracket accessory kits may be purchased from Lucent. See Table 4-1 for available
product codes.

4-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Table 4-1. GX 550 Bracket Accessory Kit Product Codes

Equipment Rack Size Type of Bracket Mounting Bracket


Product Code

19-inch Mid-mount 11663

23-inch Flush-mount 11664A

23-inch EIA Rack Mid-mount 11661A

23-inch Telco Rack Mid-mount 11665A

Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch


This section describes how to set up the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch on an
equipment rack. Lucent does not recommend setting up the GX 550 as a free-standing
switch.

Caution – Failure to use the proper screws may damage the switch. Use the screws
! provided in the bracket accessory kit.

Equipment Rack Requirements


You can mount the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch on either a 19-inch or 23-inch
equipment rack.
• If you are using a 19-inch equipment rack, it must meet ANSI/EIA-RS-310-C
standards. A 19-inch Telco rack cannot be used.
• If you are using a 23-inch equipment rack, it must meet either
ANSI/EIA-RS-310-C or Telco standards.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-3


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Installing the Equipment Rack


To install the equipment rack:
1. See Chapter 2, “Specifications and Safety Warnings” for ventilation and cable
space requirements, and position the rack accordingly. Verify that the switch has
the proper ventilation. All cables connect to the back of the switch.

Caution – The weight and position of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch within
! the equipment rack may make the rack top-heavy or unstable if the rack is not securely
anchored.

2. Anchor the equipment rack securely.

Flush-mounting in a 19-inch Equipment Rack


The GX 550 is delivered with mounting flanges built into its front for flush-mounting
in a 19-inch equipment rack. To install the switch on the 19-inch equipment rack:
1. Raise the switch to the appropriate installation height, using a hand lift (or a
minimum of three installers).
2. For both the left and right sides of the switch, align the screw holes on the switch
mounting bracket with the six screw holes on the equipment rack (see Figure 4-1).
3. For both the left and right sides of the switch, install six #10-32 Phillips truss-head
screws through the switch mounting bracket into the mount bracket on the
equipment rack using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver (see Figure 4-1).

4-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Figure 4-1. Installing the GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch in an


Equipment Rack

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-5


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Mid-mounting in a 19-inch Equipment Rack


Mid-mount installation of the GX 550 switch requires attaching specialized
mid-mount brackets before installing the unit into an equipment rack. You can order
these brackets from Lucent using the product codes listed in Table 4-1.

To mid-mount the switch in a 19-inch equipment rack, first install the 7-inch
mid-mount rack extensions (Product code 11663):
1. Raise the right rack extension to the appropriate installation height (see
Figure 4-2).
2. Align the five screw holes on the rack extension with the screw holes on the
mount bracket on the equipment rack.

4-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Ventilation
Holes
Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Installing 7-inch Rack Extensions Installing the GX 550 Switch into the
Equipment Rack

Figure 4-2. Installing the GX 550 Switch Using 7-inch Rack Extensions
3. Install five screws of the appropriate size (10-32 or 12-24) through the rack
extension into the mount bracket on the equipment rack, using a #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver.
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the left rack extension.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-7


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Perform the steps to install the switch on the equipment rack or rack extension:
1. Raise the switch to the appropriate installation height, using a hand lift (or a
minimum of three installers).

Caution – To prevent switch damage from overheating, ensure that the top three
! ventilation holes on the side of a rack extension line up with the vents below the
switch fabric module on the side of the switch (see Figure 4-2 on page 4-7).

2. For both the left and right sides of the switch, align the screw holes on the switch
mounting bracket with five screw holes on the equipment rack (see Figure 4-3 on
page 4-9).
3. For both the left and right sides of the switch, install five #10-32 Phillips
truss-head screws through the switch mounting bracket into the mount bracket on
the equipment rack using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver.

Flush-mounting in a 23-inch Equipment Rack


Flush-mount installation of the GX 550 switch in a 23-inch rack requires attaching
specialized flush-mount brackets before installing the unit into an equipment rack.
You can order these brackets from Lucent using the product codes listed in Table 4-1.

To flush-mount the switch in a 23-inch equipment rack first install the mounting
brackets (Product code 11664A):
1. Raise the right rack extension to the appropriate installation height.
2. Align six screw holes on the rack extension with the screw holes on the mount
bracket on the equipment rack (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-9).

4-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Installing 23-inch Flush-mount Rack Installing the GX 550 Switch into the
Extensions Equipment Rack

Figure 4-3. Installing the GX 550 Switch using 23-inch Flush-Mount


Rack Extensions
3. Install six screws of the appropriate size (10-32 or 12-24) through the rack
extension into the flush-mount bracket on the equipment rack, using a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-9


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the left rack extension.

Perform the steps to install the switch on the rack extensions:


1. Raise the switch to the appropriate installation height, using a hand lift (or a
minimum of three installers).
2. For both the left and right sides of the switch, align six screw holes on the switch
mounting bracket with six screw holes on the equipment rack (see Figure 4-3).
3. For both the left and right sides of the switch, install six #10-32 Phillips truss-head
screws through the switch mounting bracket into the mount bracket on the
equipment rack using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver.

Mid-mounting in a 23-inch Equipment or Telco Rack


Mid-mount installation of the GX 550 switch requires attaching specialized
mid-mount brackets before installing the unit into a 23-inch equipment or Telco rack.
You can order these brackets from Lucent using the product codes listed in Table 4-1.

To mid-mount the switch in a 23-inch equipment or Telco rack first install the
mounting brackets (Product code 11661A or 11665A):
1. Raise the right rack extension to the appropriate installation height.
2. Align six screw holes on the rack extension with the screw holes on the mount
bracket on the equipment rack (see Figure 4-4 on page 4-11).

4-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Installing 23-inch Mid-mount Rack Installing the GX 550 Switch into


Extensions the Equipment Rack

Figure 4-4. Installing the GX 550 Switch using 23-inch Mid-mount


Rack Extensions

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-11


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Setting Up as a Rack-mounted Switch

3. Install six screws of the appropriate size (10-32 or 12-24) through the rack
extension into the mount bracket on the equipment rack, using a #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver.
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the left rack extension.

Perform the steps to install the switch on the equipment rack:


1. Raise the switch to the appropriate installation height, using a hand lift (or a
minimum of three installers).

Caution – To prevent switch damage from overheating, ensure that the top ventilation
! holes on the side of the rack extension line up with the vents below the switch fabric
module on the side of the switch (see Figure 4-4 on page 4-11).

2. For both the left and right sides of the switch, align six screw holes on the switch
mounting bracket with six screw holes on the equipment rack (see Figure 4-4 on
page 4-11).
3. For both the left and right sides of the switch, install six #10-32 Phillips truss-head
screws through the switch mounting bracket into the mount bracket on the
equipment rack using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver.

4-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Connecting Cables to the Switch

Connecting Cables to the Switch


After the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch is set up in the desired location, you must
install cables to connect it to the network, to a console, and to the NMS. If an external
clock source or remote alarms are used, you must also connect the appropriate cables.

Data Connections
To connect the fiber-optic cables to the switch:
1. After the switch is set up, remove the protective covers from all of the physical
interface (phy) module ports at the back of the switch. The protective covers are
for shipping and storage use only.
2. Connect the switch to the network by attaching the appropriate fiber-optic cables
to the phy module ports (SC connectors) at the back of the switch (see Figure 4-5).
Figure 4-6 on page 4-14 shows the port numbering for the phy modules in each
four-slot group (for example, slots 3A – 3D).
Rx Rx
OC3 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3
OC48 OC12 OC3 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM1
STM16 STM4 STM1 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 4-5. Connecting Fiber-Optic Cables (rear)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-13


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Connecting Cables to the Switch

1 9 1 9 1 9
Tx
1
2 10

3 11

4 12

5 13 5 13 5 13

6 14

Rx
7 15 1

8 16

Four OC-3c/STM-1 Four OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16 Four GX 550 ES


Phy Modules in slots Phy Modules in slots Phy Module in slots Downlink Phy
xA – xD xA – xD xA – xD Modules (if supported)
in slots
xA – xD

Figure 4-6. Physical Port Numbering

Console Terminal Connections

Shielded Cables

To ensure compliance with the FCC Class A limits, use shielded for the console
connections.

4-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Connecting Cables to the Switch

Cable and Pinout Information

See Appendix B, “Cables and Pinout Assignments” for information about the cables
used to connect the console to the switch and for console cable pinouts.

Directly Connecting a PC Console

To connect a PC console directly to the switch:


1. Connect the male connector of the shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub
diagnostic cable to the NET MGMT port on the node processor adapter (NPA)
(see Figure 4-7).
2. Connect the female connector on the cable to the serial port on the PC.

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

To Console or
To Console
Modem Serial
Serial
Port Port

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Figure 4-7. Console Connection to a GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch


(rear)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-15


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Connecting the Switch to the NMS

Directly Connecting a SPARCstation Console

To connect a SPARCstation console directly to the switch:


1. Connect the male connector of the shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub
diagnostic cable to the NET MGMT port on the NPA (see Figure 4-7).
2. Connect the 9-pin to 25-pin adapter to the female connector on the cable.
3. Connect the adapter end of the cable to the serial port on the SPARCstation.

Connecting a Remote Dial-up Console

To establish a remote dial-up connection from the console to the switch:


1. Connect the DB-9 connector of the DB-9 to DB-25 shielded crossover cable to the
NET MGMT port on the NPA (see Figure 4-7 on page 4-15).
2. Connect the DB-25 connector on the cable to the serial port on the modem.

Connecting the Switch to the NMS


If the switch being installed is the first switch into your network (the gateway switch),
read and follow the instructions in this section; otherwise proceed to Chapter 5,
“Powering Up the GX 550.”

Before You Begin


The SPARCstations that you are using for network management should be dedicated
for that purpose. Using the NMS hardware for other tasks slows the performance of
the network management functions. After you have the appropriate hardware, you can
begin installing the OS and network management software.

For information about the hardware requirements and appropriate configuration for
your NMS workstation, and instructions for installing the OS and network
management software, see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Network Management Station
Installation Guide. After you have installed the OS and network management
software on the NMS, you can connect the switch to the NMS by using one of the
methods listed in the next section.

4-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Connecting the Switch to the NMS

NMS Connection Methods


You can connect the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch to the NMS by using any of
the following methods. Lucent recommends direct or indirect Ethernet as the primary
connection method from the NMS to the switch.

Direct Ethernet — Connects the switch and NMS when they are on the same LAN.
This method provides the greatest speed and ease-of-use. See “Using Direct Ethernet”
on page 4-18.

Indirect Ethernet — Connects the switch and the NMS when they are on separate
LANs. This option requires a router. See “Using Indirect Ethernet” on page 4-19.

Management VC (VPI/VCI) — Connects the NMS and the switch through a single
router or via an ATM network interface card (NIC). This connection is recommended
when you use an attached NMS or an IP host to transfer information between the host
and a local switch. See “Using Management VC/PVC” on page 4-20.

Management PVC — Connects the NMS or IP host to the switch via an ATM router
or a NIC. You can use this type of connection for all applications that use a switch
(particularly a remote switch) and an attached NMS or IP host. The Management PVC
connection is an actual PVC between the UNI port (connected to the NMS or IP host)
and the remote switch. Management PVC connections prevent overhead management
traffic from burdening the switch. See “Using Management VC/PVC” on page 4-20.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-17


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Connecting the Switch to the NMS

Using Direct Ethernet


To connect the NMS to the switch by using a direct Ethernet connection:
1. Connect one end of the NMS Ethernet wire to the RJ-48 ENET Ethernet port
located on the NPA module (see Figure 4-8).

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

To NMS
Ethernet Port

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Figure 4-8. Direct Ethernet Connection (rear)


2. Connect the other end of the NMS Ethernet wire to the LAN on which the switch
resides.
3. Ensure that the Ethernet transceivers are properly connected to the network.
4. See the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Getting Started Guide to configure the NMS
connection.

4-188/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Connecting the Switch to the NMS

Using Indirect Ethernet


To connect the NMS to the switch using an indirect Ethernet connection:
1. Connect the NMS to a LAN, using an Ethernet wire.
2. Connect one end of a second Ethernet wire to the ENET port on the NPA module.
(see Figure 4-9).
3. Connect the other end of the second Ethernet wire to a LAN that has router
connectivity to the LAN on which the NMS resides.
4. Ensure that the Ethernet transceivers are connected properly to the network.
5. See the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Getting Started User’s Guide to configure the
NMS connection.

Timing Module

To NMS Good
Failed
StnBy

Ethernet Port Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Router

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Figure 4-9. Indirect Ethernet Connection (rear)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-19


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Connecting the Switch to the NMS

Using Management VC/PVC


If you will be using Management VCs or PVCs to send management data to the NMS,
connect the NMS to the switch as follows:
1. Perform one of the following:
• Connect an ATM router to a physical port on a phy module, and connect the
NMS to the LAN that has the router connection (see Figure 4-10).
• Set up an ATM NIC on the NMS, and connect the NIC to a physical port on
the switch.
2. See the B-STDX, CBX, and GX ATM Services Configuration Guide for more
information about configuring Management PVCs or Management VPI/VCIs
from the switches to the NMS.
Rx Rx
OC3 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

To NMS

Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx

Router Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx 3

...
Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3
OC48 OC12 OC3 OC48 OC48 OC48

...
STM1 STM1
STM16 STM4 STM1 STM16 STM16 STM16

OR PHY
MM
PHY
PHY
MM
MM
PHY
MM
PHY
MM
PHY
MM
PHY
MM
PHY
MM

NMS NIC

Figure 4-10. Management VC/PVC Connection (rear)

4-208/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
External T1 Clock Source Connection

External T1 Clock Source Connection


Use the instructions in this section only if you want to use an external T1 clock source
for your switch network.

External T1 Clock Description


The T1 timing inputs work with DS1 timing references that comply with the ANSI
T1.102 standard. The T1 timing output takes its timing source from the clock source
on the Timing module as configured via the NMS.

You can configure the T1 operation mode through the NMS. For example, you can
adjust the line buildouts over a range of 0 to 655 feet for T1 timing outputs. For
instructions, see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX ATM Services Configuration Guide.

To connect the external T1 clock, perform the steps provided in the section,
“Connecting the External T1 Clock” on page 4-22.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-21


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
External T1 Clock Source Connection

Connecting the External T1 Clock


To connect an external T1 clock source input or output:
1. At the rear of the switch, remove the protective cover from the T1 wire-wrap pins
on the NPA (see Figure 4-11).
2. Strip the end of a solid 26 AWG wire approximately 1 to 1-1/2 inches.
3. Insert the stripped end of the wire into a wire-wrap gun for a .045 square post.
4. Use the wire-wrap gun to install the wire onto the wire-wrap pins.
5. Reinstall the protective cover onto the wire-wrap pins.

T R S
I N G
P G N

T1 Clock E1 Clock
Connections Connections

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Figure 4-11. Clock Connections (rear)

4-228/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
External E1 Clock Source Connection

External E1 Clock Source Connection


Use the instructions in this section only if you want to use an external E1 clock source
for your switch network.

External E1 Clock Description


The E1 timing inputs work with E1 timing references that comply with the ITU-T
G.703, Section 6 standard. The E1 timing output takes its timing source from the clock
source on the Timing module as configured via the NMS. You can configure the E1
operation mode through the NMS. (You cannot adjust the line buildouts for E1 timing
outputs.) For instructions, see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX ATM Services Configuration
Guide.

Connecting the External E1 Clock


To connect an external E1 clock-source input or clock output, connect a 75-ohm cable
with a BNC connector to the appropriate E1 BNC ports on the NPA module at the rear
of the switch (see Figure 4-11 on page 4-22).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-23


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Remote Alarm Connection

Remote Alarm Connection


This section describes how to connect remote alarms.

Remote Alarm Signals


The NPA module has an ALARM STATUS DB-26 connector that provides
connections for remote audio and visual alarms. These alarm signals alert you to
critical, major, and minor alarm conditions in the switch. You can use a DB-26 to
18-terminal-block adapter (normally open, contact closed), provided in the accessory
kit, to connect alarm wires to the ALARM STATUS DB-26 connector.

Table 4-2 lists the remote alarm signal names and their pin and terminal number
assignments. Figure 4-12 on page 4-25 shows the pin numbers for the DB-26
connector and the terminal numbers for the terminal block side of the adapter.
Table 4-2. Remote Alarm Signal Pinouts

Signal Pin No. on Terminal No. on


ALARM STATUS Terminal Block
Connector and on Side of Adapter
DB-26 Side of
Adapter

Major Switch Error- visual 2 1

Major Switch Error- visual — Return 3 2

Minor Switch Error- visual 4 3

Minor Switch Error- visual — Return 5 4

Major Switch Error - power 6 5

Major Switch Error - power — Return 7 6

Minor Switch Error - power 8 7

Minor Switch Error - power — Return 9 8

4-248/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Remote Alarm Connection

Table 4-2. Remote Alarm Signal Pinouts (Continued)

Signal Pin No. on Terminal No. on


ALARM STATUS Terminal Block
Connector and on Side of Adapter
DB-26 Side of
Adapter

Critical Switch Error - visual 10 9

Critical Switch Error - visual — Return 11 10

Critical Switch Error - audible 12 11

Critical Switch Error - audible — Return 13 12

Major Switch Error - audible 14 13

Major Switch Error - audible — Return 15 14

Minor Switch Error- audible 17 15

Minor Switch Error- audible — Return 18 16

8 16
26 19

18 10

ALARM STATUS

9 1

1 9

Figure 4-12. Terminal Numbers for Terminal Block and Pin Numbers for
DB-26 Connector

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-25


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Remote Alarm Connection

Connecting Remote Alarms


To connect remote alarms with the DB-26 to 18-terminal-block adapter:
1. At the rear of the switch, connect the DB-26 end of the adapter to the ALARM
STATUS connector on the NPA (see Figure 4-13 on page 4-27).
2. At the terminal block end of the adapter (see Figure 4-12 on page 4-25), locate the
appropriate terminals for the alarm signal and its return (see Table 4-2 on
page 4-24).
3. Using a 1/8-inch flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws on the terminals.
4. Using 12-24 AWG solid or stranded wire, strip the ends of the wire approximately
1/4-inch (6.35 mm).
5. Insert the wire leads into the appropriate alarm signal and return signal terminal
connectors.
6. Using a 1/8-inch flathead screwdriver, tighten the screws on the alarm signal and
the return terminals to secure the leads.
7. Connect the other end of the wire to the alarm.

4-268/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Installing the GX 550
Remote Alarm Connection

Alarm Status Port

Timing Module

Timing Module

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN


Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Figure 4-13. Remote Alarm Connector (rear)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/044-27


Installing the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Remote Alarm Connection

4-288/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

5
Powering Up the GX 550
This chapter describes the following topics:
• Determining the Power Connection Methods
• Obtaining Required Tools and Materials
• Connecting Power Cables to the Switch
• Applying Power to the Switch

Before You Begin


Before connecting power to the switch, verify that the following tasks (mostly from
Chapter 4) are complete:
• Setting up the switch on an equipment rack (see page 4-3)
• Connecting cables and console terminal to the switch (see page 4-13)
• Setting up the NMS (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Network Management Station
Installation Guide.)
• Connecting the NMS to the switch if it is the gateway switch (see page 4-16)
• (Optional) Connecting the external clock source inputs and outputs
(see page 4-21)
• (Optional) Connecting the remote alarms (see page 4-24)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/045-1


Powering Up the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Powering Up Overview

Powering Up Overview
Powering up the switch includes the following tasks:
1. Determining the power connection method to use (see below)
2. Obtaining the necessary materials and tools (see page 5-3)
3. Connecting power cables to the switch (see page 5-4)
4. Applying power to the switch (see page 5-7)

Determining the Power Connection Methods


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch requires -48 or -60 VDC power. See Table 5-1
to determine which power connection method to use.
Table 5-1. GX 550 Power Connection Methods

Type Description

DC Power Source If you have a DC power source, you can connect


directly to it. You should connect to both sets of
power connectors. To ensure continuous power in the
event of a power source failure, attach each power
cord into a different DC power source, if possible.

DC Input Power Protection Unit If you have a DC power source and want to provide
(DCPPU) additional protection from transients, you can connect
the switch to a DCPPU, i.e., connecting to both sets
of power connectors on the switch. See section “DC
Input Power Protection Unit (DCPPU)” in Chapter 2,
and Appendix A, “Module Specifications” for more
information.

AC-to-DC Rectifier If you have an AC power source, connect the switch


to an AC-to-DC rectifier. See sections “AC-to-DC
Rectifier Unit” in Chapter 2 and “AC-to-DC Rectifier
Unit” in Appendix A for more information. Use only
one set of power connectors on the switch.

5-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Powering Up the GX 550
Obtaining Required Tools and Materials

Obtaining Required Tools and Materials


To connect power to the switch, you need the following materials and tools:
• DC power cord wires

Note – The wire gauge that you use depends on the distance from the connection
point and also on the system configuration. The maximum power rating of the GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch is 3,000 watts. The actual input voltage can range from -40
to -72 VDC, so the maximum input current is 75 amperes.

• Suitable listed two-hole lugs (e.g., a Panduit LCD4-14D-L) for the grounding,
return, and power studs
• Tool recommended by the lug manufacturer for connecting a two-hole lug to the
power cord
• External Power Alarm cable for the Node Processor Adapter (if you are using an
AC-to-DC rectifier or a DCPPU)
• #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
• 3/8-in. wrench or socket

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/045-3


Powering Up the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Connecting Power Cables to the Switch

Connecting Power Cables to the Switch


To connect power cables to the switch, perform the following steps for each set of
power connectors that you will use (see “Determining the Power Connection
Methods” on page 5-2).

Warning – Follow the “DC Power Supply Warnings” and “Safety Warnings” in
Chapter 2.

1. Verify that the correct power source is available (see the section,
“Power Specifications” in Chapter 2).

Warning – Verify that the power is off or disconnected at the source before continuing
with this procedure.

2. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the
protective cover over the power connectors, and remove the protective cover
(see Figure 5-1). If you are connecting to only one set of power connectors, you
can use either the A or B power connectors (for example, when connecting the
switch to an AC-to-DC rectifier).
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Rx

Tx 4

Rx

Tx 4 Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 5-1. Protective Covers on Power Connections

5-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Powering Up the GX 550
Connecting Power Cables to the Switch

3. If necessary, terminate the power, return, and grounding wires in suitable listed
two-hole lugs (e.g., a Panduit LCD4-14D-L), using the tool recommended by the
manufacturer.
4. Using a 3/8-in. wrench or socket, remove the nut and top washer (see Figure 5-2)
from each of the studs that are under the labels -48V, RTN, and . Do not remove
the bottom washer.

5. Install the lug from the grounding wire onto the studs, and ensure that the
grounding wire is connected to an external safety ground.

Note – Lucent recommends that, to provide a single-point ground connection, only


one of the chassis grounds should be connected to earth ground ( ).

6. Install the appropriate lugs from the power cord onto the -48V and RTN studs.

7. Reinstall the washer and nut onto each stud under the labels -48V, RTN, and ,
then use a 3/8-in. wrench or socket to tighten the nuts.
8. Reinstall the protective cover with the four screws (see Figure 5-1 on page 5-4).

RTN –48V RTN –48V

FEED A FEED B

to DC power source or
to DCPPU

Figure 5-2. Power Connections

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/045-5


Powering Up the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
Connecting Power Cables to the Switch

9. Repeat step 2 through step 8 if you are connecting to both sets of power
connectors.
10. If you are using an AC-to-DC rectifier or a DCPPU, connect one end of the
External Power Alarm cable to the appropriate connector on the rectifier or the
DCPPU, and connect the other end to the EXT PWR ALARM connector on the
Node Processor Adapter at the rear of the switch (see Figure 5-3).

EXT PWR ALARM


connector

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Figure 5-3. Connecting Power Signal Cable (rear)


11. Connect the other end of the main power cords into the power source for the
switch (a direct DC power source, a DCPPU, or an AC-to-DC rectifier). To ensure
continuous power in the event of a power source failure, you should plug each
power cord into a different DC power source, if possible.

5-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Powering Up the GX 550
Applying Power to the Switch

Applying Power to the Switch

Caution – If the switch is powered up and does not contain a Timing module, the
! cooling fans will not operate and the equipment can be damaged from overheating. Do
not power up the switch unless a Timing module is installed.

The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch has no power switch. Apply power to the
switch in one of the following ways:
• If you are using an AC-to-DC rectifier, toggle its power switch to the ON position.
• If you are using a DC Power Protection Unit (DCPPU), toggle its power switch to
the ON position.
• If you are connecting the switch directly to a DC power source, set the power
source to the ON position.

What’s Next?
After the hardware installation is complete and the switch is powered up, check the
LEDs to determine the operating status of the switch and of the individual modules as
described in Chapter 6, “Determining the Operating Status.”

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/045-7


Powering Up the GX 550
Beta Draft Confidential
What’s Next?

5-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

6
Determining the Operating Status
This chapter describes how to determine the operating status of the GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch and its individual modules by observing the LEDs on each
module. (The node processor adapter has no LEDs.) This chapter includes the
following topics:
• Viewing LEDs
• Module LED Locations
• Switch Status LEDs
• Module Status LED Descriptions
• Port Alarm LEDs
• Redundancy Status LEDs (StnBy)
• Fan Tray LEDs

Viewing LEDs
The condition of each status LED on the switch can be viewed in two ways:
• By viewing the actual LED on the switch.
• By viewing the LED condition through NavisCore on the Network Management
Station (NMS). See the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Diagnostics User’s Guide.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-1


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Module LED Locations

Module LED Locations


The following illustrations show all of the LEDs on each module in the switch, and
include a reference to the description of each LED.

Node Processor Module


Figure 6-1 shows the LEDs located on the node processor module.

The LEDs on the new node processor, NP2, are identically located. See for more
information about the NP2.
Module Status Good LED: See
Switch Status Good “Node Processor and BIO Modules”
LED: See “Switch Status on page 6-8
LEDs” on page 6-7
Marg. LED: See “Switch Status
LEDs” on page 6-7

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Status Failed LED: See


“Switch Status LEDs” on page 6-7 Module Status Failed LED: See
“Node Processor and BIO Modules”
on page 6-8
StnBy LED: See “Node Processor
Module” on page 6-15

Figure 6-1. Node Processor Module LEDs

6-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Module LED Locations

Base Input/Output (BIO) Module


Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 shows the LEDs located on a BIO module.

The LEDs on both the BIO1 and BIO2 module versions are identically located.

Good LED: See “Node Processor


and BIO Modules” on page 6-8

Good
Failed

Failed LED: See “Node Processor and


BIO Modules” on page 6-8

Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
Port Alarm LEDs: See “Port Alarm 4

LEDs” on page 6-12 5


6
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

Figure 6-2. BIO Module LEDs

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-3


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Module LED Locations

Switch Fabric Module


Figure 6-3 shows the LEDs located on the switch fabric module.
Good LED: See “Switch Fabric and
Timing Modules” on page 6-10

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Failed LED: See “Switch Fabric and StnBy LED: See “Switch Fabric and
Timing Modules” on page 6-10 Timing Modules” on page 6-16

Figure 6-3. Switch Fabric Module LEDs

6-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Module LED Locations

Phy Modules
Figure 6-4 shows the LEDs located on the physical interface (phy) modules.

Good LED: See “Phy Modules”


on page 6-11

Good
Fail LED: See “Phy Modules” Fail
Tx 1
on page 6-11

Rx

OC12
STM4
PHY
IR

Figure 6-4. Phy Module LEDs

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-5


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Module LED Locations

Timing Module
Figure 6-5 shows the LEDs located on the timing module.

Failed LED: See “Switch Fabric and Good LED: See “Switch Fabric and
Timing Modules” on page 6-10 Timing Modules” on page 6-10

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

StnBy LED: See “Switch Fabric and


Timing Modules” on page 6-16

Figure 6-5. Timing Module LEDs

Fan Tray Modules


See “Fan Tray LEDs” on page 6-17.

6-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Switch Status LEDs

Switch Status LEDs


The Good, Marg., and Failed status LEDs on the NP module indicate the overall
switch status (see Figure 6-6). These LEDs indicate the status of the switch, not the
NP module itself. Table 6-1 describes each switch status LED.
Table 6-1. Switch Status LEDs on NP Module

LED Condition Indicates

Good (Green) ON The switch is fully operational; no errors have been detected.

Marg. (Yellow) ON The switch hardware is operational, but the software


configuration has not been downloaded, or a non-fatal error
condition exists on the switch.

Failed (Red) ON The switch detected an operational error condition.

Switch Status LEDs

Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Figure 6-6. Switch Status LEDs on Node Processor Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-7


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Module Status LED Descriptions

Module Status LED Descriptions


The following sections describe each of the module status LEDs.

Node Processor and BIO Modules


Each NP1/NP2 module and BIO1/BIO2 module has Good and Failed LEDs that show
the operating condition of the module (see Figure 6-7 on page 6-9 and Figure 6-8 on
page 6-9). Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 describe the module status LEDs.
Table 6-2. Module Status LEDs on NP and BIO Modules

LED Condition Indicates

Good (Green) ON The module is fully operational; no errors are detected.

Failed (Red) ON The module detected an operational error condition.

Good and/or Failed BLINKING The OS software image is currently being downloaded
or booted. See Table 6-3 for a complete description.

Table 6-3. NP and BIO Module Status LEDs During the Boot Process

Module Good (Green) Module Failed (Red) LED Indicates


LED Condition Condition

OFF Blinking slowly, one second Extended Power On Self Test


ON, then one second OFF (POST) failure

Continuously ON Blinking rapidly Boot Flash image update


from hard disk

ON/OFF at the same time ON/OFF at the same time as Application image being read
as Failed LED the Good LED from hard disk

Blinking OFF Application image or PRAM


image being uncompressed

ON/OFF in sequence that ON/OFF in sequence that PRAM image being read
alternates with Failed LED alternates with Good LED from hard disk

6-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Module Status LED Descriptions

Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

NP Module Status LEDs

Figure 6-7. Module Status LEDs on Node Processor Module

Good
Failed

BIO Module Status LEDs

Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

Figure 6-8. Module Status LEDs on BIO Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-9


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Module Status LED Descriptions

Switch Fabric and Timing Modules


Each SF and timing module has Good and Failed LEDs that show the operating
condition of the module (see Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10). Table 6-4 describes each
module status LED.
Table 6-4. Module Status LEDs on SF and Timing Modules

LED Condition Indicates

Good (Green) ON The module is fully operational; no errors have been detected.

Failed (Red) ON The module detected an operational error condition.

Good
Failed
StnBy

SF Module Status LEDs

Figure 6-9. Module Status LEDs on SF Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module Status LEDs

Figure 6-10. Module Status LEDs on Timing Module

6-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Module Status LED Descriptions

Phy Modules
Each phy module has a Good and a Fail LED, which show the operating condition of
the phy module (see Figure 6-11). Table 6-5 describes each module status LED.
Table 6-5. Module Status LEDs on Phy Modules

LED Condition Indicates

Good (Green) ON The module is fully operational; no errors have been


detected.

Fail (Red) ON The module detected an operational error condition.

Good (Green) and Fail (Red) Physical ports have not been initialized. This occurs
ON just before the physical ports are initialized during the
boot process and when a phy module is hot-swapped.

Good (Green) and Fail (Red) Physical ports are being initialized. This occurs during
BLINKING the boot process and when a phy module is
hot-swapped.

Phy Module Status LEDs

Good
Fail
Tx 1

Figure 6-11. Module Status LEDs on Phy Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-11


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Port Alarm LEDs

Port Alarm LEDs


The BIO modules (BIO1 and BIO2) have LEDs (see Figure 6-12) that indicate alarm
conditions for each of the ports on the corresponding phy module.

Good
Failed

Port Alarm LEDs


Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

Figure 6-12. Port Alarm LEDs on BIO Module

6-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Port Alarm LEDs

Port Numbering
The port alarm LED numbers on a BIO module refer to the port numbers for the phy
module in the corresponding four-slot group at the rear of the GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch. For example, the port alarm LED numbers for the BIO module (BIO1 or
BIO2) in slot 3 refer to the phy module ports in slots 3A – 3D.

Figure 6-13 shows the port numbering for the phy modules in a four-slot group. For
example, the four OC-12c/STM-4 modules have port alarm LEDs at the locations 1, 5,
9, and 13 on the front of the BIO module; for OC-48/STM-16 modules, only port
alarm LED 1 is active.

1 9 1 9 1 9
Tx
1
2 10

3 11

4 12

5 13 5 13 5 13

6 14

Rx
7 15 1

8 16

Four OC-3c/STM-1 Four OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16 Four GX 550 ES


Phy Modules in slots Phy Modules in slots Phy Module in slots Downlink Phy Modules
xA – xD xA – xD xA – xD (if supported) in slots
xA – xD

Figure 6-13. Physical Port Numbering

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-13


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Port Alarm LEDs

Port Alarm Conditions


Table 6-6 describes each port alarm LED.
Table 6-6. Port Alarm LEDs

LED Condition Indicates

Yellow Alarm ON Remote equipment is indicating failure.

Red Alarm BLINKING (also A downstream equipment failure has been detected on
called a Blue Alarm) the circuit for the indicated port.

Red Alarm ON A loss of signal has occurred on the port. (When a Red
Alarm is ON, the Yellow Alarm is OFF.)

Yellow and Red Alarms The thread for these ports is being initialized. This
momentarily ON for a set of four occurs during the boot process and when a phy module
ports (1–4, 5–8, 9–12, 13–16) is hot-swapped for a different type of phy module.

Yellow Alarm momentarily ON Physical port is being initialized. This occurs during the
for a port boot process and when a phy module is hot-swapped.

6-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Redundancy Status LEDs (StnBy)

Redundancy Status LEDs (StnBy)


The following sections describe each of the redundancy status LEDs.

Node Processor Module


The NP module has a StnBy LED (see Figure 6-14) that indicates the redundancy
status of the module. Table 6-7 describes the StnBy LED on the NP.
Table 6-7. StnBy LED on the NP

StnBy LED State Indicates

ON Module is the active module and a standby module is installed.

BLINKING Module is the standby module.

OFF Module is the active module and no standby module is installed.

Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor StnBy LED

Figure 6-14. StnBy LED on the Node Processor

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-15


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Redundancy Status LEDs (StnBy)

Switch Fabric and Timing Modules


The SF and timing modules each have a StnBy LED (see Figure 6-15 and Figure 6-16)
that indicates the redundancy status of the module. Table 6-8 describes the StnBy
LED.
Table 6-8. StnBy LEDs on the SF and Timing Modules

StnBy LED State Indicates

ON Module is the standby module.

OFF Module is the active module.

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric StnBy LED

Figure 6-15. StnBy LED on the SF Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module StnBy LED

Figure 6-16. StnBy LED on the Timing Module

6-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Determining the Operating Status
Fan Tray LEDs

Fan Tray LEDs


Table 6-9 describes the fan tray LED (see Figure 6-17) located on each fan tray.
Table 6-9. Fan Tray LEDs

LED State Indicates

Green Fan Tray is operational.

Red Fan Tray has failed.

SF/NP Fan Tray (No. 3) LED Timing/NPA Fan Tray (No. 1) LED

Timing Module
Node Processor
Good Good
Diag. Port Failed
Marg. StnBy
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Timing Module
Node Processor
Good
Diag. Port Good Failed
Marg. StnBy
Failed Good
StnBy Failed
NPA Module
Switch Fabric

Good EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Failed Fan Tray
StnBy No. 1
Fan

Status
Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Fan Status
Fan Tray
No. 3

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx
Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms


Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 Good Good
8 8 8 8 8 Fail Fail
9 9 9 9 9
Tx 1 Tx 1
10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 Rx Rx
16 16 16 16 16

Tx 2

Rx
Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
125 125 125 125 125 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Fan Status /Fan Tray No. 4

Fan Fault

BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) LED Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) LED
(GX 550 front) (GX 550 rear)

Figure 6-17. Fan Tray LEDs

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/046-17


Determining the Operating Status
Beta Draft Confidential
Fan Tray LEDs

6-188/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

7
Removing and Installing
Components
In the following topics, this chapter describes how to remove and install the GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch components:
• Removal and Installation Precautions
• Node Processor Module
• Switch Fabric Module
• Base Input/Output (BIO) Module
• OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules
• GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module
• Timing Module
• Node Processor Adapter Module
• Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter
• Timing/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)
• BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter
• Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-1


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Removal and Installation Precautions

Removal and Installation Precautions


Follow the precautions in the following sections to avoid personal injury and damage
to the equipment.

Parts Repair
Do not attempt to repair parts or modules yourself. Only Lucent-trained service
representatives are authorized to service parts. Contact the Technical Assistance
Center (see page xxxv in the preface, “About This Guide”) for instructions.

Caution – Repairing parts or modules yourself can damage the equipment. Only
! Lucent-trained service representatives are authorized to service parts.

Static Protection

Warning – Static electricity can damage the equipment. Wear an antistatic wrist strap
when handling any of the switch components.

Before handling any of the switch components, put on the antistatic wrist strap that is
provided in the accessory kit, and connect it to the grounding jack on the front or rear
of the switch (see Figure 3-2 on page 3-6).

Electrical Energy Hazard

Warning – When the switch is powered up, an electrical energy hazard is present
within the card cage. Remove all metallic objects from hands and wrists to prevent
bridging of live contact points.

7-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Node Processor Module

Node Processor Module


This section describes how to remove and install a node processor (NP1 or NP2)
module. For information about the NP2, see Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)”.

Note – If you are upgrading an NP1 to an NP2, you must refer to Chapter 9,
“Upgrading the Node Processor” for detailed instructions regarding this procedure.

Note – Although the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch can pass cell traffic with no
NP module installed, this is not the recommended mode of operation. Upon
reinsertion of one or both NPs, the BIOs and SFs will reinitialize, causing the cell
traffic flow to stop. Use the recommended procedures for NP removal and
replacement and no cell loss will be incurred.

Removing the NP Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the NP1 or NP2 module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-1 in Chapter 3).
2. At the front of the switch, grasp the edges of the bezel that covers the SF modules
and NP modules, and pull on the bezel to remove it (see Figure 7-1 on page 7-4).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-3


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Module

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor
Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-1. Removing the Front Bezel

Caution – Do not remove an active NP module from the switch if the switch is
! powered up. Either switch over to a redundant NP or power down the switch, as
described in step 3.

3. Check the StnBy LED status (see Figure 6-1 in Chapter 6) on the NP module that
you want to remove.
• If the StnBy LED is blinking, continue to step 4. (You are removing a standby
NP module.)
• If the StnBy LED is on (you are removing the active NP module, and a
standby NP is installed), have the NMS operator perform a “switch to
redundant card” operation (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module
Configuration Guide), and then continue to step 4.
• If the StnBy LED is off (you are removing the active NP and no standby NP is
installed), power down the switch and continue to step 4.

7-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Node Processor Module

4. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the left


and right of the NP module (see Figure 7-2).

Node Processor
Modules
Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-2. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Node Processor


5. Slide the ejector lock (1) to the left to disconnect the NP module from the switch
(see Figure 7-3).

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good

1 Marg.
Failed
StnBy
Good
Failed

Switch Fabric

2 Good
Failed
StnBy
2 Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Good
Failed
StnBy
Failed
StnBy
Switch Fabric

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-3. Removing the Node Processor


6. Lift the left and right card ejectors (2) simultaneously to disengage the NP module
from the switch.
7. Slide the NP module out of the switch, and place it in an antistatic container.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-5


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Module

Installing the NP Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install an NP1 or NP2 module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If the bezel that covers the switch fabric and NP modules on the front of the
switch is in place, grasp the edges of the bezel and pull to remove it
(see Figure 7-4).

Node Processor
Modules
Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor
Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric
Node Processor
Good
Diag. Port Good Failed
Marg. StnBy
Failed
StnBy
Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-4. Inserting the NP Module


3. Ensure that the left and right card ejectors on the NP module are lifted
(see Figure 7-4).
4. At the front of the switch, align the NP module with the card guides and carefully
slide the module into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors.

7-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Node Processor Module

5. Depress the card ejectors (1) simultaneously (see Figure 7-5).


6. Slide the ejector lock (2) to the right.
7. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum
of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the left and right of the NP module.
8. Power up the switch if necessary.

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good

2
Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Good Good

1 Failed
StnBy
1 Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-5. Securing the NP Module


9. Before continuing, wait until the Good LED (module status) is either solid green
or flashing slowly (see Figure 6-1 in Chapter 6). This may take several minutes.
If you are installing a redundant NP module, also wait until the StnBy LED on the
redundant NP is blinking and the StnBy LED on the active NP is on.

Note – If the original operating system (loaded at the factory before shipping the NP)
becomes lost or corrupted, follow the instructions in the appropriate switch-code
software release notes to download a new OS and configuration.

10. Reinstall the front bezel by aligning the posts on each corner of the bezel with the
holes on the chassis (see Figure 7-4 on page 7-6). Then push on the left and right
front of the bezel with the palms of your hands to snap the cover back into place.
11. If you installed a redundant NP module and the switch did not previously have
one, the NMS operator should configure the switch for a redundant NP
(see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide.)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-7


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric Module

Switch Fabric Module


This section describes how to remove and install a switch fabric (SF) module.

Removing the SF Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the SF module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. At the front of the switch, grasp the edges of the bezel that covers the SF modules
and NP modules, and pull on the bezel to remove it (see Figure 7-6).

Switch Fabric
Modules
Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor Node Processor


Good Diag. Port Good
Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-6. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Switch Fabric


3. If a redundant SF module is not installed, power down the switch.
4. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the left
and right of the SF module (see Figure 7-6).

7-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Switch Fabric Module

5. Slide the ejector lock (1) to the left to disconnect the SF module from the switch
(see Figure 7-7).
6. Lift the left and right card ejectors (2) simultaneously to disengage the SF module
from the switch.
7. Slide the SF module out of the switch, and place it in an antistatic container.

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
1
Failed
StnBy

2 Good
Failed
StnBy
2 Switch Fabric

Good
Good
Failed
StnBy
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-7. Removing the Switch Fabric Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-9


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric Module

Installing the SF Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install a switch fabric (SF) module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If the bezel that covers the SF and NP modules on the front of the switch is in
place, grasp the edges of the bezel and pull to remove it (see Figure 7-8).

Switch Fabric
Modules
Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor Node Processor


Good Diag. Port Good
Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric
Switch Fabric
Good
Good Failed
Failed StnBy
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-8. Inserting the SF Module


3. Ensure that the left and right card ejectors on the SF module are lifted
(see Figure 7-8).
4. At the front of the switch, align the SF module with the card guides and carefully
slide the module into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors.

7-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Switch Fabric Module

5. Depress the card ejectors (1) simultaneously (see Figure 7-9).

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Node Processor Node Processor

Diag. Port Good Diag. Port Good


Marg. Marg.
Failed Good Failed Good
StnBy Failed StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy 2 Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good Good

1
Failed
StnBy
1 Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-9. Securing the SF Module


6. Slide the ejector lock (2) to the right.
7. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum
of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the left and right of the SF module.
8. Power up the switch, if necessary.
9. Before continuing, wait until the Good LED is on (see Figure 6-3 in Chapter 6).
If you are installing a redundant SF module, also wait until the StnBy LED on the
redundant SF is on.
10. Reinstall the front bezel by aligning the posts on each corner of the bezel with the
holes on the chassis (see Figure 7-8 on page 7-10). Then push on the left and right
front of the bezel with the palms of your hands to snap the cover back into place.
11. If you install a redundant SF module in a switch that previously had none, the
NMS operator should configure the switch for a redundant SF (see the B-STDX,
CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-11


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module

Base Input/Output (BIO) Module


This section describes how to:
• Remove a BIO1 or BIO2 module
• Install a BIO1 or BIO2 module
• Upgrade from a BIO1 module to a BIO2 module

Removing a BIO Module

Potential Data Loss

Removing a BIO module terminates any circuits running through it, possibly resulting
in a loss of data. Lucent recommends that you set the BIO module’s Administrative
Status to Down via the NMS before removing the module. For instructions, see the
B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide.

Removal Steps

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove a BIO1 or BIO2 module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the top
and bottom of the BIO module at the front of the switch (see Figure 7-10 on
page 7-13, left).
3. Slide the ejector lock (1) down to disconnect the BIO module from the switch
(1 in Figure 7-10, center).
Ensure that the ejector lock is fully disengaged.

7-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module

4. Lift the top and bottom card ejectors (2 in Figure 7-10, center) simultaneously to
disengage the BIO module from the switch.
5. Slide the BIO module out of the switch (Figure 7-10, right) and place it in an
antistatic container.
6. If you are not replacing the BIO module, place a blank cover over the slot and
tighten the top and bottom screws on the cover by using a #2 Phillips-head
screwdriver.

2
Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Good
Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms
Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

5
Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port 6 Diag. Port Diag. Port
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

2
ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 Diag. Port 125 125

ATM BIO
125

Figure 7-10. Removing the BIO Module

Installing a BIO Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install a BIO1 or BIO2 module:

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-13


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module

1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If the front slot in which you are installing the BIO module has a blank cover, use
a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the cover’s top and bottom thumbscrews
and remove the cover.
3. Ensure that the top and bottom card ejectors on the BIO module are lifted
(see Figure 7-11).
4. At the front of the switch, align the BIO module with the card guides and carefully
slide the module into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors (Figure 7-11, left).

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Good
Failed

Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms
Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

5
6 Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
Diag. Port 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125

ATM BIO
125

Figure 7-11. Installing the BIO Module


5. Depress the card ejectors simultaneously (1 in Figure 7-11, center).
6. Slide the ejector lock up (2 in Figure 7-11, center).
7. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum
of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the top and bottom of the BIO module
(Figure 7-11, right).

7-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module

8. Before continuing, wait until the Good LED (see Figure 6-2 in Chapter 6) is either
solid green or flashing slowly. This may take several minutes.

Note – If the NP detects a mismatch of boot code between the NP and the new BIO
module, the NP automatically downloads its current version of the boot code to the
BIO module prior to downloading the application code. The BIO module may reboot
several times before the download process completes.

9. If you are replacing a BIO module, the NMS operator should set the BIO
module’s Administrative Status to Up (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch
Module Configuration Guide).
10. If you install a BIO module in a slot that did not previously have one, the NMS
operator must configure the BIO module (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch
Module Configuration Guide).

Upgrading From a BIO1 Module to a BIO2 Module


The following sections describe how to upgrade from a BIO1 module to a BIO2
module.

Upgrade Steps

To upgrade from a BIO1 module to a BIO2 module, perform the following steps:
1. Verify that you have the correct version of software installed for BIO2 support.
2. Review the information in “Removing a BIO Module” on page 7-12 and
“Installing a BIO Module” on page 7-13.
3. Using NavisXtend Tools, run the BIO1 to BIO2 conversion utility by following
the steps in “Performing a Sybase Upgrade Using NavisXtend Tools” on
page 7-16.
4. Remove the existing BIO1 module, using the instructions in “Removing a BIO
Module” on page 7-12.
5. Insert a BIO2 module into the empty slot, using the instructions in “Installing a
BIO Module” on page 7-13.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-15


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module

6. Wait for the configuration to be copied to the BIO2 module, and verify it by
issuing the show copy command from the switch console.

Note – For more information about this console command, see the B-STDX, CBX,
and GX Console Command Reference.

Performing a Sybase Upgrade Using NavisXtend Tools

NavisXtend Tools includes a utility that modifies the Sybase database before you
upgrade from a BIO1 module to a BIO2 module.

Note – This utility works with NavisXtend database version 02.50.02.00 or later. It
automatically checks for the correct version and exits if the version is incorrect.

1. From the HP OpenView window, select Misc ŸNavisXtend Tools. This option
launches a browser. If this is the first time that you are accessing NavisXtend
Tools, the NavisXtend Tools—AutoMake Facility window appears.
2. Choose the Load NavisXtend Tools button. The NavisXtend Tools main menu
appears.
3. Select the conv_BIO1_to_BIO2 utility.

Note – If you are not logged into NavisXtend Tools, a login screen appears. Once you
are logged in, press your browser’s Back button until you return to the conversion
utility screen.

4. Select the switch and the slot ID of the BIO1 card you want to convert. A logon
prompt appears.
5. Enter the user ID and password for your Sybase database.

7-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Base Input/Output (BIO) Module

Note – If no activity occurs for 30 minutes, the connection will time out and the
system will prompt you to re-enter your user ID and password.

6. Choose Execute to run the conversion utility.


The following is an example of the output that appears for this utility:

BIO1 card on slot 2 on switch s550 has converted to BIO2 card


***** FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS TO COMPLETE THE TASK *****
1. Return to the HP OpenView / NavisXtend Network map.
2. Replace the old card with the new card.
3. PRAM sync the NP after the conversion.
4. PRAM sync the card involved in the card conversion.
conv_BIO1_to_BIO2 Complete.

Note – For more information about NavisXtend Tools, see the NavisXtend Tools
User’s Guide.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-17


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16


Phy Modules
This section describes how to remove and install the following physical interface
(phy) modules: OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16.

Removing an OC Module

Potential Data Loss

Any circuits running through the phy module are terminated when the module is
removed, which may result in possible data loss. Lucent recommends setting the
Administrative Status of each physical port on the phy module to Down via the NMS
before removing the module from the switch. For instructions, see the B-STDX, CBX,
and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide.

Removal Steps

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove a phy module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. At the rear of the switch, tag any optical fibers for identification and reconnection,
and disconnect the optical fibers from the physical ports on the phy module.

7-188/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

3. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the top


and bottom of the phy module (see Figure 7-12).

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3
OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM1
STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

OC-3c/STM-1 or OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16

Figure 7-12. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Phy Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-19


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

4. Slide the ejector lock (1) down to disconnect the phy module from the switch
(see Figure 7-13).
5. Lift the top and bottom card ejectors (2) simultaneously to disengage the phy
module from the switch.

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail
Tx 1
Fail Fail
Tx 1
Fail
Tx 1
Fail Fail Fail
Fail
Tx 1 2 Fail
Tx 1
Fail
Tx 1
Fail Fail Fail

Rx Rx Rx
Rx
1 Rx Rx

Tx 2
Tx 2

Rx
Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx
Rx

Tx 4
Tx 4

Rx
Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 OC3 OC12 OC12
PHY PHY PHY STM1 STM4 STM4
MM MM MM PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM

Good Good

2 Fail
Tx 1
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Tx 1

Rx Rx

1
Tx 2
Rx

Tx 2
Rx

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3
Tx 3

Rx
Rx

Tx 4
Tx 4

2 Rx
OC3
STM1
OC48
STM16
OC12
STM4
OC48
STM16
OC48
STM16
OC48
STM16
Rx
OC3
STM1
2 OC48
STM16
OC12
STM4
OC48
STM16
OC48
STM16
OC48
STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

OC-3c/STM-1 or OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16

Figure 7-13. Releasing the Phy Module


6. Slide the phy module out of the switch (see Figure 7-14 on page 7-21), and place
it in an antistatic container.

7-208/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Tx 1
Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 2
Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 3
Rx Rx

Tx 4

Rx

Tx 4 Rx
OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM
Rx
OC3
STM1
PHY
MM OC48
STM16
PHY
MM

OC-3c/STM-1 or OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16

Figure 7-14. Removing the Phy Module

Installing an OC Module

Before You Begin

Before a phy module can function, a BIO module (BIO1 or BIO2) must be installed in
the corresponding slot in the front of the switch.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-21


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

Restrictions on Slot 12D

Slot 12D cannot be used. Do not install an OC-3c/STM-1 or an OC-12c/STM-4 phy


module in Slot 12D, and do not install an OC-48/STM-16 phy module in slots
12A – 12D (see Figure 7-15).
Status

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Slot 12D
Fan Fault

Figure 7-15. Slot 12 and Phy Modules

Installation Steps

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

7-228/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

To install a phy module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If the slot in which you are installing the phy module has a blank cover, use a
#2 Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the cover’s top and bottom thumbscrews
and remove the cover. (If you are installing an OC-48/STM-16 phy module, you
may need to remove up to four blank covers.)
3. If you are installing an OC-48/STM-16 phy module and the slot has a center card
guide, perform the following steps:
a. Place a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver through the circular opening in the center
card guide at the rear of the switch, and loosen the captive screw that holds the
card guide to the backplane of the switch (see Figure 7-16).
b. Remove the center card guide.
Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx Tx
Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-16. Removal of the Phy Module Center Card Guide

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-23


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

4. Ensure that the top and bottom card ejectors on the phy module are lifted
(see Figure 7-17).

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Tx 1
Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 2
Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 3
Rx Rx

Tx 4

Rx

Tx 4 Rx
OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM
Rx
OC3
STM1
PHY
MM OC48
STM16
PHY
MM

OC-3c/STM-1 or OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16

Figure 7-17. Inserting the Phy Module


5. At the rear of the switch, align the phy module with the card guides and carefully
slide the module into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors.
6. Depress the card ejectors (1) simultaneously (see Figure 7-18 on page 7-25).

7-248/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2
2
Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

2
Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

1 1

OC-3c/STM-1 or OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16

Figure 7-18. Locking the Phy Modules


7. Slide the ejector lock (2) up.
8. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum
of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the top and bottom of the phy module
(see Figure 7-19 on page 7-26).
9. Reconnect the optical fibers to the physical ports and remove any identification
tags.
10. Verify that the Good LED on the phy module is on (see Figure 6-4 in Chapter 6).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-25


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 Phy Modules

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3
OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM1
STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

OC-3c/STM-1 or OC-12c/STM-4 OC-48/STM-16

Figure 7-19. Securing Thumbscrews on the Phy Module


11. If you replaced a phy module, the NMS operator should set the Administrative
Status to Up for each physical port on the phy module (see the B-STDX, CBX, and
GX Switch Module Configuration Guide).
12. If you installed a phy module in a slot that did not previously have one or that had
a different type of phy module, the NMS operator should configure the
corresponding BIO module and the physical ports for the phy module
(see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide).

7-268/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module


This section describes how to remove and install a GX 550 ES (Extender Shelf)
downlink phy module in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch.

Note – Read the applicable GX 550 switch software release notice (SRN) to
determine whether the GX 550 ES is supported in your current release.

Removing a GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the GX 550 ES downlink phy module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the GX 550 (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If applicable, disconnect the multimode fiber cable from the physical port on the
downlink phy module at the rear of the switch and tag the cable for identification
and reconnection.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-27


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

3. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the top


and bottom of the downlink phy module (see Figure 7-20).

Timing Module

Timing Module

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC12 GX 550 ES
STM1 STM4 DOWNLINK
PHY PHY PHY
MM MM

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3

Figure 7-20. Loosening Thumbscrews on the Downlink Phy Module


4. Slide the ejector lock (1) down to disconnect the downlink phy module from the
switch (see Figure 7-21 on page 7-29).
5. Lift the top and bottom card ejectors (2) simultaneously to disengage the
downlink phy module from the switch.

7-288/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

6. Slide the downlink phy module out of the switch (see Figure 7-21), and place it in
an antistatic container.

Timing Module Timing Module

Timing Module Timing Module

NPA Module NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1 EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1

Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
2
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Tx 1
Good
Fail
Good
Fail
Good
Fail

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Good
Fail
Tx 2 Tx 2
Tx 1

Rx Rx
Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx
OC3
STM1
2
OC12 GX 550 ES
STM4 DOWNLINK
Rx
OC3
STM1
OC12
STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

GX 550 ES
DOWNLINK
PHY

Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Figure 7-21. Removing the Downlink Phy Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-29


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

Installing a GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

Before You Begin

Before a GX 550 ES downlink phy module can function, a BIO module (BIO1 or
BIO2) must be installed in the corresponding slot in the front of the GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch.

Restrictions on Slot 12D

The downlink phy module can be installed in any phy slot except Slot 12D on the
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch (see Figure 7-15 on page 7-22).

Installation Steps

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install a GX 550 ES downlink phy module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If the slot in which you are installing the downlink phy module has a blank cover,
use a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the cover’s top and bottom
thumbscrews and remove the cover (see Figure 7-22 on page 7-31).

7-308/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

3. Ensure that the top and bottom card ejectors on the downlink phy module are
lifted (see Figure 7-22).

Timing Module Timing Module

Timing Module Timing Module

NPA Module NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1 EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1

Blank
cover

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx
Good
Fail
Tx 2 Tx 2
Tx 1

Rx Rx
Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC3 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM1 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

GX 550 ES
DOWNLINK
PHY

Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Figure 7-22. Inserting the Downlink Phy Module


4. At the rear of the switch, align the downlink phy module with the card guides and
carefully slide the module into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has
engaged the backplane connectors.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-31


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

5. Depress the card ejectors (1) simultaneously (see Figure 7-23).


6. Slide the ejector lock (2) up.
7. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum
of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the top and bottom of the downlink
phy module.

Timing Module Timing Module

Timing Module Timing Module

NPA Module NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1 EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx

Tx 2
Rx
2 Rx Rx

Tx 2
Rx Rx

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 GX 550 ES OC3 OC12 GX 550 ES
STM1 STM4 DOWNLINK STM1 STM4 DOWNLINK
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

1
Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Figure 7-23. Securing the Downlink Phy Module

7-328/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

8. Reconnect the multimode fiber cable to the physical port and remove any
identification tags.
9. Verify that the Good LED on the downlink phy module is on (see Figure 6-11 in
Chapter 6).
10. If you replaced a downlink phy module, the NMS operator should set the
Administrative Status to Up for each physical port on the downlink phy module
(see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide).
11. If you installed a downlink phy module in a slot that did not previously have one,
the NMS operator should configure the corresponding BIO module and the
physical ports for the downlink phy module (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX
Switch Module Configuration Guide).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-33


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Timing Module

Timing Module
This section describes how to remove and install a timing module.

Warning – If there is no timing module present, the switch will not function.
!

Removing a Timing Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the timing module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. If a redundant timing module is not installed, power down the switch.

Warning – Operating the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch with no timing module
! will shut down the cooling fans and can cause equipment damage from overheating.

3. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the left


and right of the timing module (see Figure 7-24 on page 7-35).
4. Slide the ejector lock (1) to the left to disconnect the timing module from the
switch.
5. Lift the left and right card ejectors (2) simultaneously to disengage the timing
module from the switch.

7-348/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Timing Module

Timing Modules

Timing Module Timing Module

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

Timing Module Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy 1 Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
2 EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN 2
E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-24. Releasing the Timing Module


6. Slide the timing module out of the switch (see Figure 7-25), and place it in an
antistatic container.

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

Timing Module
EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Good
Failed
StnBy

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM

Figure 7-25. Removing the Timing Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-35


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Timing Module

Installing a Timing Module

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install a timing module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. Ensure that the left and right card ejectors on the timing module are lifted
(see Figure 7-26).

Timing Modules

Timing Module Timing Module

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

Timing Module

Good

2
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module NPA Module

Timing Module
EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET
Good
Failed
StnBy
T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
1 EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
1

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-26. Inserting and Locking the Timing Module


3. At the rear of the switch, align the timing module with the card guides and
carefully slide the module into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has
engaged the backplane connectors.
4. Depress the card ejectors (1) simultaneously.
5. Slide the ejector lock (2) to the right.

7-368/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Timing Module

6. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum


of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the left and right of the Timing module
(see Figure 7-27).
7. Power up the switch, if necessary.
8. Verify that the Good LED on the timing module is on (see Figure 6-5 in
Chapter 6). If you are installing a redundant Timing module, also verify that the
StnBy LED is on.

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM

Figure 7-27. Securing Thumbscrews on the Timing Module


9. If you installed a redundant timing module and the switch did not previously have
one, the NMS operator should configure the switch for a redundant timing module
(see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-37


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Adapter Module

Node Processor Adapter Module


This section describes how to remove and install the node processor adapter module
(NPA).

Removing the NPA

Note – You can remove the NPA module from the switch even if the switch is
powered up. There is no need to power down the switch before removal.

Removing the NPA module causes network management connectivity with the switch
to be lost, so you should remove and replace the NPA as quickly as possible. If the
switch is being managed over an in-band ATM connection, NMS connectivity will
remain intact. However, other interfaces provided by the NPA, including external
timing and NPA-provided alarms, are lost during the time the NPA is removed.

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the NPA module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).
2. Disconnect any cables from the NPA module at the rear of the switch
(see Figure 7-28 on page 7-39) and tag them for identification and reconnection.

7-388/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Node Processor Adapter Module

Timing Module Timing Module

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

Timing Module Timing Module

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-28. Removing the Node Adapter Processor


3. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the left
and right of the NPA module.
4. Grasp the thumbscrews, slide the NPA module out of the switch, and place it in an
antistatic container.

Installing the NPA

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install an NPA module:


1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into the
ESD grounding jack on the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-39


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Adapter Module

2. At the rear of the switch, align the NPA module with the card guides and carefully
slide the module into the switch (see Figure 7-29). Press firmly to ensure that it
has engaged the backplane connectors.

Timing Module Timing Module

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

Timing Module Timing Module

Good Good
Failed Failed
StnBy StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-29. Installing the NPA Module


3. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews (using a maximum
of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque) located on the left and right of the NPA module.
4. Reconnect the cables to the NPA module and remove the identification tags.
5. Power up the switch, if necessary.
6. Verify that the Good LED (module status) on the NP module is on
(see Figure 6-1 in Chapter 6).

7-408/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3)


or Fan Tray Air Filter
This section describes how to remove and install the switch fabric/node processor fan
tray (Fan Tray No. 3) or fan tray air filter.

Removing the Fan Tray


You are not required to power down the switch to replace the fan tray. The switch can
run without fans for a short period of time and can tolerate the temperatures outlined
in the section, “Site Specifications” in Chapter 2.

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the switch fabric/node processor (SF/NP) fan tray:


1. At the front of the switch, grasp the edges of the bezel that covers the SF and NP
modules, and pull on the bezel to remove it (see Figure 7-30).

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor
Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric

Good Good Good Good Good


Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Figure 7-30. Removing/Installing Bezel Over the SF/NP Fan Tray

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-41


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter

2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws located on the
top and bottom of the SF/NP fan tray (see Figure 7-31).

Node Processor Node Processor

Node Processor Node Processor

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Figure 7-31. Removing the SF/NP Fan Tray

Caution – Do not place your fingers near the fans when removing the fan tray from
! the switch. The fan blades may still be turning.

3. Grip the two captive screws, and carefully slide the SF/NP fan tray out of the
switch along the card guides.

Note – When the SF/NP fan tray is removed from the switch, the LED on the timing
NP fan tray (No. 1) goes out. However, the timing NP fan tray is still working, and its
LED comes on again when the SF/NP fan tray is installed in the switch.

7-428/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Installing the Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the switch fabric/node processor (SF/NP) fan tray:


1. At the front of the switch, align the SF/NP fan tray with the guides, grip the two
captive screws located on the top and bottom of the fan tray, and slide the fan tray
into the switch (see Figure 7-32).

Node Processor Node Processor

Node Processor Node Processor

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Figure 7-32. Installing the SF/NP Fan Tray


2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, tighten the two captive screws.
3. Verify that the LED on the fan tray is green.
4. Reinstall the front bezel by aligning the posts on each corner of the bezel with the
holes on the chassis (see Figure 7-30 on page 7-41). Then push on the left and
right front of the bezel with the palms of your hands to snap the cover back into
place.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-43


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Removing the Air Filter

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the switch fabric/node processor (SF/NP) fan tray air filter:
1. At the front of the switch, grasp the edges of the bezel that covers the SF and NP
modules, and pull on the bezel to remove it (see Figure 7-30 on page 7-41).
2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws located on the
top and bottom of the SF/NP fan tray air filter cover, and remove the air filter
cover (see Figure 7-33).
3. Grab the tongue of the air filter and carefully slide the air filter out of the switch.

Node Processor Node Processor Node Processor

Node Processor Node Processor Node Processor

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Figure 7-33. Removing the SF/NP Fan Tray Air Filter

Caution – Air filters must be vacuumed or replaced once a month to prevent heat
! from building up inside the chassis. To order a replacement air filter, contact your
sales representative.

The air filter is washable and can be vacuumed.

7-448/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Installing the Air Filter

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the switch fabric/node processor (SF/NP) fan tray air filter:
1. At the front of the switch, carefully slide the air filter into the switch
(see Figure 7-34).

Node Processor Node Processor Node Processor

Node Processor Node Processor Node Processor

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Switch Fabric Switch Fabric Switch Fabric

Figure 7-34. Installing the SF/NP Fan Tray Air Filter


2. Put the SF/NP fan tray air filter cover in place, and tighten the two captive screws
using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver.
3. Reinstall the front bezel by aligning the posts on each corner of the bezel with the
holes on the chassis (see Figure 7-30 on page 7-41). Then push on the left and
right front of the bezel with the palms of your hands to snap the cover back into
place.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-45


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Timing/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)

Timing/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)


This section describes how to remove and install the timing/node processor adapter
fan tray (Fan Tray No. 1).

Running the Switch While Replacing Fan Trays


You are not required to power down the switch to replace the fan tray. The switch can
run without fans for a short period of time and can tolerate the temperatures outlined
in the section, “Site Specifications” in Chapter 2.

Removing the Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the timing/node processor adapter (NPA) fan tray:


1. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws located at the
top and bottom of the timing/NPA fan tray access cover at the rear of the switch,
and remove the cover (see Figure 7-35).

7-468/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Timing/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)

Timing Module Timing Module Timing Module

Timing Module Timing Module Timing Module

NPA Module NPA Module NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx

Figure 7-35. Removing the Timing/NPA Fan Tray

Caution – Do not place your fingers near the fans when removing the fan tray from
! the switch. The fan blades may still be turning.

2. Carefully slide the timing/NPA fan tray out of the switch along the card guides.

Installing the Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the timing/node processor adapter (NPA) fan tray:


1. At the rear of the switch, align the timing/NPA fan tray with the guides and slide it
into the switch (see Figure 7-36).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-47


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Timing/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)

Timing Module Timing Module Timing Module

Timing Module Timing Module Timing Module

NPA Module NPA Module NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx Tx 3 Tx Tx

Figure 7-36. Installing the Timing/NPA Fan Tray


2. Put the timing/NPA fan tray access cover in place, and tighten the two captive
screws with a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver.
3. Verify that the LED on the fan tray is green.

7-488/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter

BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter


This section describes how to remove and install the base input/output (BIO) fan tray
(Fan Tray No. 4) or fan tray air filter.

Running the Switch While Replacing Fan Trays


You are not required to power down the switch to replace the fan tray. The switch can
run without fans for a short period of time and can tolerate the temperatures outlined
in the section, “Site Specifications” in Chapter 2.

Removing the BIO Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the base input/output (BIO) fan tray:


1. At the front of the switch, grasp the edges of the bezel that covers the BIO fan
tray, and pull on the bezel to remove it (see Figure 7-37).
Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-37. Removing the Bezel Over the BIO Fan Tray

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-49


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter

2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the four screws on the right and left
edges of the BIO fan tray access cover, and remove the cover (see Figure 7-38).

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-38. Removing the BIO Fan Tray Access Cover


3. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the BIO fan tray (see Figure 7-39).

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-39. Removing the BIO Fan Tray

Caution – Do not place your fingers near the fans when removing the fan tray from
! the switch. The fan blades may still be turning.

4. Carefully slide the BIO fan tray out of the switch along the card guides.

7-508/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Installing the BIO Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the base input/output (BIO) fan tray:


1. At the front of the switch, align the BIO fan tray with the guides and slide it into
the switch (see Figure 7-40).

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-40. Inserting the BIO Fan Tray


2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, tighten the two captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the BIO fan tray.
3. Put the BIO fan tray access cover in place, and tighten the four captive screws
with a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver (see Figure 7-41 on page 7-52).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-51


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-41. Installing the BIO Fan Tray Access Cover


4. Verify that the LED on the fan tray is green.
5. Reinstall the front bezel by aligning the posts on each corner of the bezel with the
holes on the chassis (see Figure 7-42). Then push on the left and right front of the
bezel with the palms of your hands to snap the cover back into place.
Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-42. Installing the Bezel Over the BIO Fan Tray

7-528/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Removing the BIO Air Filter

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the base input/output (BIO) fan tray air filter:


1. At the front of the switch, grasp the edges of the bezel that covers the BIO fan tray
and air filter, and pull on the bezel to remove it (see Figure 7-37 on page 7-49).
2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the four captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the BIO fan tray access cover, and remove the cover
(see Figure 7-38 on page 7-50).
3. Grab the tongue of the air filter and carefully slide the air filter out of the switch
(see Figure 7-43).

Caution – Air filters must be vacuumed or replaced once a month to prevent heat
! from building up inside the chassis. To order a replacement air filter, contact your
sales representative.

The air filter is washable and can be vacuumed.

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-43. Removing the BIO Fan Tray Filter

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-53


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
BIO Fan Tray (No. 4) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Installing the BIO Air Filter

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the base input/output (BIO) fan tray air filter:


1. At the front of the switch, carefully slide the air filter into the switch
(see Figure 7-44).
Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125

Figure 7-44. Inserting the BIO Fan Tray Filter


2. Put the BIO fan tray access cover in place, and tighten the four captive screws
with a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver (see Figure 7-41 on page 7-52).
3. Reinstall the front bezel by aligning the posts on each corner of the bezel with the
holes on the chassis (see Figure 7-42 on page 7-52). Then push on the left and
right front of the bezel with the palms of your hand to snap the cover back into
place.

7-548/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air


Filter
This section describes how to remove and install the phy modules fan tray
(Fan Tray No. 2) or fan tray air filter.

Running the Switch While Replacing Fan Trays


You are not required to power down the switch to replace the fan tray. The switch can
run without fans for a short period of time and can tolerate the temperatures outlined
in the section, “Site Specifications” in Chapter 2.

Removing the Phy Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the phy modules fan tray:


1. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the four captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the phy modules fan tray access cover at the rear of the
switch, and remove the cover (see Figure 7-45).

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-45. Removing the Phy Modules Fan Tray Access Cover

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-55


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the two captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the phy modules fan tray (see Figure 7-46).

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-46. Removing the Phy Modules Fan Tray

Caution – Do not place your fingers near the fans when removing the fan tray from
! the switch. The fan blades may still be turning.

Caution – When removing the fan tray from the switch, do not bump any phy module
! cables or power cables.

3. Carefully slide the phy module fan tray out of the switch along the card guides.

7-568/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Installing the Phy Fan Tray

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the phy modules fan tray:


1. At the rear of the switch, align the phy modules fan tray with the guides and slide
it into the switch (see Figure 7-47).
2. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, tighten the two captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the phy modules fan tray.

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-47. Inserting the Phy Modules Fan Tray

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-57


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

3. Put the phy modules fan tray access cover in place, and tighten the four captive
screws with a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver (see Figure 7-48).

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-48. Installing the Phy Modules Fan Tray Access Cover
4. Verify that the LED on the fan tray is green.

Removing the Phy Air Filter

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To remove the phy modules fan tray air filter:


1. Using a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver, loosen the four captive screws located on the
right and left edges of the phy modules fan tray access cover at the rear of the
switch, and remove the cover (Figure 7-45 on page 7-55).

7-588/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft ConfidentialRemoving and Installing Components
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

2. Grab the tongue of the air filter and carefully slide the air filter out of the switch
(see Figure 7-49).
Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-49. Removing the Phy Modules Fan Tray Air Filter

Caution – Air filters must be vacuumed or replaced once a month to prevent heat
! from building up inside the chassis. To order a replacement air filter, contact your
sales representative.

The air filter is washable and can be vacuumed.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/047-59


Removing and Installing Components
Beta Draft Confidential
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2) or Fan Tray Air Filter

Installing the Phy Air Filter

Warning – The following procedure may make the device susceptible to electrostatic
charge.

To install the phy modules fan tray air filter:


1. At the rear of the switch, carefully slide the air filter into the switch
(see Figure 7-50).
Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Figure 7-50. Inserting the Phy Module Fan Tray Filter


2. Put the phy modules fan tray access cover in place, and tighten the four captive
screws with a 1/4-in. flathead screwdriver (see Figure 7-48 on page 7-58).

7-608/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

8
Node Processor 2 (NP2)
The Node Processor 2 (NP2) is an enhanced version of the original NP (or NP1),
which provides system-level control and management functions for the gateway
switch. The NP2 module is the same size as the NP1 module, and is installed and
removed in the same way.

See Chapter 7, “Removing and Installing Components,” if you need information about
NP removal or installation. See Appendix A, “Module Specifications” for more
information about the NP1.

Figure 8-1 shows a front view of the NP2.


Node Processor 2
NP 2 Diag.
ITP Good
Marg.
Failed Good
Stand Failed
By

Figure 8-1. Node Processor Module 2 (NP2)

Enhanced Functionality
The NP2 has all of the functionality of the NP1, and also the following enhancements:
• Redundancy based on keep-alive signals and fault management triggers
(See also the section, “Node Processor Redundancy” in Appendix D.)
• More system memory (768 MB) for system protocol support
• Support for 10/100 BT Ethernet
• Onboard storage of up to one hour of accounting data

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/048-1


Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Beta Draft Confidential
Enhanced Functionality

• Faster MPK module processor speed (500 MHz; 100 MHz for system memory)
• Hard disk replaced by flash disk (2 GB) for greater reliability
• Higher console port speed (115,200 bps; 19,200 bps for NP1)
• New type of diagnostics port with EIA-232/RS-232 interface

New Diagnostics and ITP Ports


The new type of diagnostics port on the NP2 provides an EIA-232/RS-232 interface
for diagnostics through a terminal window. The connector interface to the NP2
diagnostics port is an RJ45 serial interface. See the section, “Diagnostics Port for
BIO2 or NP2 Modules” in Appendix B for more information about the NP2’s
diagnostics port.

The ITP (In Target Probe) interface is not for customer use. It provides a connection to
an emulator for design and debugging purposes. The emulator vendor provides the
correct code tap, depending on the operating voltage of the modular processing
kernel’s (MPK’s) daughter card. See the section, “MPK Null Modem Converter” in
Appendix B for more information about the MPK.

NP2 Interoperability With NP1


An NP2 can interoperate with an NP1 within the same switch during an upgrade from
an NP1 to an NP2, without losing switch configuration. There is also interoperability
among NP1- and NP2-based GX 550 switches in permanent configurations at the
same central office switch site.

Valid Active/Standby Configurations

Since the NP2 has 768 MB of RAM and the NP1 has 128 MB of memory, the NP2 can
build a bigger routing database and can store much more billing information than an
NP1. Therefore, the only valid configuration supported in the field are NP1-NP1 and
NP2-NP2, except during the upgrade process. At all other times with an NP1-NP2
redundant combination, the integrity and proper functionality of the switch is not
assured.

8-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Forcing an NP Switchover

Upgrading from an NP1 to an NP2

See Chapter 9, “Upgrading the Node Processor” for detailed instructions regarding the
method of procedure for upgrading an NP1 to an NP2.

Forcing an NP Switchover
Using NavisCore from a remote console connected to the GX 550, perform the
following steps to force an NP switchover in which the redundant (standby) NP
becomes the active NP and the active NP becomes the standby NP:
1. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
2. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon from
the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
3. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.
4. Select the NP module slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel.
(Note: selecting an NP also selects the switching fabric and timing modules).
5. From the Actions options menu on the Switch Back Panel dialog box, select
Switch to Redundant Unit.
6. Choose Go. The SwitchOver dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2. SwitchOver Dialog Box


7. Select Node Processor (NP).
8. Choose OK. The standby NP becomes the active NP, and the active NP becomes
the standby NP.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/048-3


Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Beta Draft Confidential
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using


NavisCore
By default, an installed NP2 is shown as an NP1 in NavisCore unless you select
Node Processor 2 from the Set Card Attributes dialog box, as described in the section,
“Configuring the Node Processor to NP2.”

The following sections describe how to use NavisCore to:


• Set the NP configuration to an NP2, after an NP2 has been installed
• View the current NP configuration

Configuring the Node Processor to NP2


Usually, you configure the NP module attributes after you configure the gateway
switch attributes during the initial installation of a GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
(as described in the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Getting Started User’s Guide).

Configure the NP module to an NP2 during an upgrade from an NP1 to an NP2, as


follows:
1. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
2. From the Misc menu, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon. Enter your operator password.
3. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.
4. Point to the NP slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel and double-click
the left mouse button. The Set Card Attributes dialog box appears
(see Figure 8-3 on page 8-5).
5. Set the Card Type field to Node Processor 2 in the Set Card Attributes dialog box,
and verify that the other fields are set appropriately, as described in Table 8-1 on
page 8-5.

8-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Figure 8-3 displays the Set Card Attributes dialog box for a node processor.

Figure 8-3. Set Card Attributes Dialog Box (NP)


Table 8-1 describes the Set Card Attributes dialog box fields for a node processor.
Table 8-1. Set Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP)

Field Action/Description

Node Processor

Redundancy Stand Alone – for a non-redundant NP configuration.


Redundant – for a redundant NP installed in the switch.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/048-5


Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Beta Draft Confidential
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Table 8-1. Set Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP) (Continued)

Field Action/Description

Card Type Node Processor – (default) The original node processor, or NP1.
Node Processor 2 – The new node processor, or NP2.

Admin Status Up – (default) The NP module becomes fully operational when


you start the switch. To become operational, the module gets its
application code from the NP disk drive.
Down – The NP module does not come online when you start the
switch. The configuration is saved in the switch configuration
table, but is not downloaded to the switch. Use this option when
running foreground diagnostics.
Maintenance – The NP module does not receive the application
code when you start the switch. A module in this state runs only
from boot code. This setting enables you to reset PRAM for a
module that is failing to boot due to invalid PRAM. You can also
use this option to troubleshoot a possible hardware problem.

Switching Fabric (SF) Module

Redundancy Stand Alone – for a non-redundant SF configuration.


Redundant – for a redundant SF installed in the switch.

Oper Status Displays the operational status of each SF module (SF1 and
SF2) installed in the GX switch.

Timing Module (TM)

Redundancy Stand Alone – for a non-redundant TM configuration.


Redundant – for a redundant TM installed in the switch.

Oper Status Displays the operational status of each TM module (TM1 and
TM2) installed in the GX switch.

8-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Table 8-1. Set Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP) (Continued)

Field Action/Description

CID Server Sync Specify the interval at which the CID Server synchronizes the
Interval set of reserved CIDs with the CID Manager components. The
default interval value is 10 seconds and the maximum interval
value is 3600 seconds. For more information about configuring
the CID Server, see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module
Configuration Guide.

6. Choose OK to save the attributes or choose Cancel to exit from the dialog box.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box reappears. If you selected OK, the Switch Back
Panel dialog box displays the configured NP.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/048-7


Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Beta Draft Confidential
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

7. Define system timing for the configured NP in either of two ways:


• Use the external clock sources or the internal clock as the switch clock source,
as described in Chapter 4 of the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Getting Started User’s
Guide.
• Use a BIO module’s clock source as the switch clock, as described in the
B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide.

Viewing the Node Processor Configuration


To view the NP configuration:
1. Select the switch object on the network map.
2. From the Monitor menu, select Lucent Objects Ÿ Show Detail. The Switch Back
Panel dialog box appears.
3. Double-click on the NP slot (indicated by NPA). The View Card Attributes dialog
box appears (see Figure 8-4 on page 8-9).

8-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Figure 8-4. View Card Attributes Dialog Box (NP)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/048-9


Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Beta Draft Confidential
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Table 8-2 describes the View Card Attributes dialog box buttons for an NP.
Table 8-2. View Card Attributes Dialog Box Buttons (NP)

Button Function

Oper Info Displays manufacturing data through the View Card Operational Info
dialog box (described in Chapter 2 of the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch
Diagnostics User’s Guide).

System Displays configured system-timing options through the Show System


Timing Timing dialog box (see Chapter 2 of the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch
Diagnostics User’s Guide).

Close Closes the dialog box.

Table 8-3 describes the View Card Attributes dialog box fields for an NP.
Table 8-3. View Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP)

Field Displays...

Switch Name The name of the switch in which this NP resides.

Slot ID The number of the slot in which this NP is configured.

Configured

Type The configured NP type.

8-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Table 8-3. View Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP) (Continued)

Field Displays...

Admin Status Administrative status for the card:


Up – (default) The NP becomes fully operational at switch
startup. To become operational, the module gets its application
code from the PCMCIA hard drive in the NPA module.
Down – The NP does not come online at switch startup. The
configuration is saved in the switch configuration table but is not
downloaded to the switch. Use this option when running
foreground diagnostics.
Maintenance – The NP does not receive the application code at
switch startup. A module in this state runs only from boot code.
This setting enables you to reset PRAM for a module that cannot
boot due to invalid PRAM. You can also use this option to
troubleshoot a possible hardware problem.

Actual

Type The actual module type as defined by the firmware.

Oper Status The operational status of this NP (Up or Down).

Redundancy

Setting The redundancy setting, either Stand Alone or Redundant.

Physical Slot ID The number of the slot in which the NP resides.

Status The redundancy status (if applicable), either active or standby.

CID Server Sync Specify the interval at which the CID Server synchronizes the
Interval set of reserved CIDs with the CID Manager components. The
default interval value is 10 seconds and the maximum interval
value is 3600 seconds. For more information about configuring
the CID Server, see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module
Configuration Guide.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/048-11


Node Processor 2 (NP2)
Beta Draft Confidential
Configuring and Viewing the NP2 Using NavisCore

Table 8-3. View Card Attributes Dialog Box Fields (NP) (Continued)

Field Displays...

Submodules

Type Lists the type of submodules in the NP: Switching Fabric 1,


Switching Fabric 2, Timing Module 1, or Timing Module 2.

Redundancy The redundancy setting of each submodule: Stand Alone or


Setting Redundant.

Oper Status The operational status of this submodule (Up or Down).

8-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

9
Upgrading the Node Processor
In the following topics, this chapter describes how to upgrade a node processor (NP or
NP1) to an NP2:
• Introduction
• Prerequisites
• Software Installation
• Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration
• NP Redundancy
• Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration
• Other Considerations
• Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

Introduction
The Node Processor 2 (NP2) is a newer version of the original node processor module
(NP or NP1) for the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch. This chapter describes how to
upgrade an original node processor module to an NP2 in both redundant and
non-redundant configurations. This document also describes how to revert back or
“backout” to NP1s after having upgraded to NP2s

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-1


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Introduction

Caution – Since the NP2 has 768 MB of RAM and the NP1 has 128 MB of memory,
! the NP2 can build a bigger routing database and can store much more billing
information than an NP1. Therefore, the only valid configurations supported in the
field are NP1-NP1 and NP2-NP2, except during the upgrade or backout process. At all
other times with an NP1-NP2 redundant combination, the integrity and proper
functionality of the switch is not assured.

Note – Read all of the instructions in this chapter and familiarize yourself with all
steps before starting this procedure.

Before starting the upgrade process, you must also review the GX 550 SRN that is
associated with the GX 550 Release you are using to familiarize yourself with any
release-specific information about the NP module. The GX 550 SRN does document
NP2 restrictions that you should be aware of before starting the upgrade process.

Reverting back to the NP1 following upgrade to NP2 is not recommended. See
“Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2” on page 9-27 for more information.

9-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Prerequisites

Prerequisites

Minimum Software Versions

Note – A minimum of GX 550 Switch Software Release 08.00.03.xx must be


installed and running on the GX 550 switch before you can install an NP2. NavisCore
must be at a minimum revision level of 08.00.03.xx. See the GX 550 Software
Release Notes for the specific minimum patch release version.

Before starting the upgrade process, you must also review the GX 550 SRN that is
associated with the GX 550 Release you are using to familiarize yourself with any
release-specific information about the NP module. The GX 550 SRN does document
NP2 restrictions that you should be aware of before starting the upgrade process.

In addition, the SRN contains information about software revisions, part numbers, file
types and file sizes, build IDs and descriptions, and interoperability among switches.

If you are unsure as to whether you have the required minimum version or required
software, contact the Lucent Technical Assistance Center (TAC). See the “Technical
Support” on page -xxxv for contact information for the TAC.

Before Handling the Equipment


Only a qualified customer or Lucent personnel should perform the procedures in this
document.

Warning – Static electricity can damage the equipment. Wear an antistatic wrist strap
when handling any of the switch components. Connect it to one of the ESD grounding
jacks at the front or rear of the switch, as shown in Figure 9-1 on page 9-6.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-3


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Software Installation

NP Module Insertion
When inserting horizontally-oriented modules like the NP into the switch chassis, you
must insert them as straight as possible, avoiding excessive movement in both the
horizontal and vertical directions, to avoid deforming or bending the card guides
inside the chassis. This kind of damage to the card guide causes the NP to become
stuck, or otherwise difficult to fully insert without further damage. In extreme cases, a
badly deformed card guide could allow an inserted module to fall completely through,
onto the module below.

Lucent recommends that you insert approximately one-third of the module as straight
as possible into the chassis, and then complete the insertion by placing a single finger
or thumb in the middle of the module and pressing forward with a light, constant
pressure.

Required Tools and Materials


This upgrade procedure requires the following tools and materials:
• A #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
• An antistatic wrist strap
• One Upgrade Kit (Product Code: 13502) containing the following items:
– one NP2 module (Product Code: 11542A)
– this document (970-00110-00)
• A console connection to the GX 550 switch
• Access to NavisCore

Software Installation
1. Refer to “Prerequisites” on page 9-3 for the minimum switch software version
needed to support the NP2 node processor module.
2. Before proceeding, verify that the minimum switch software is installed (see
“Minimum Software Versions” on page 9-3). If it is not installed, refer to the
appropriate SRN for detailed installation instructions and verification.

9-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant


Configuration
Caution – During NP upgrades, the NP2 can be configured as a redundant (standby)
! for an NP1, but an NP1 should not be configured as a redundant (standby) for an NP2.

The exceptions (with limitations) to this recommendation occurs when the NP is


briefly configured as the redundant during this upgrade process (prior to removal of
the NP1) and when reverting back to an NP1 configuration after having upgraded
from NP1 to NP2. See “Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2” on page 9-27
for more information.

To upgrade a non-redundant NP1 to an NP2, you cannot replace the NP1 with an NP2
and then do a PRAM-synch operation. The configuration files will not expand to the
NP2-sized configuration files.

You cannot perform an ‘Erase Standby’ operation on the NP2 when there is an
active NP1. This operation must be performed on an inactive switch.

For non-redundant NP configurations, upgrading from an NP1 to an NP2 consists of


the following tasks:
• Inserting an NP2 as a temporary redundant (standby) NP
• Forcing a switchover to the NP2
• Removing the NP1

These tasks are described in detail in the sections that follow.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-5


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

For non-redundant NP configurations, upgrading from an NP1 to an NP2 consists of


the following tasks, described in detail, as follows:
1. Verify that the minimum version of software for NP2 support is installed
(see “Minimum Software Versions” on page 9-3.)
2. Put on the antistatic wrist strap and plug it into an ESD grounding jack on the
switch, as shown in Figure 9-1.

Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port Diag. Port

ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO ATM BIO
125 125 125 125 125
Good
Failed
StnBy

Good
Failed
StnBy

T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Good
Fail

Rear Front

Figure 9-1. ESD Grounding Jacks on GX 550 Switch


3. Remove the bezel that covers the NP and SF modules on the front of the switch.
4. Verify that the three DIP switches on the installed NP1, and on the NP2 that you
want to install, are set to the default recommended mode of operation, in which all
are set to the ON (up) position.

9-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

5. On the front of the switch, verify that the NP configuration is non-redundant, as


follows:
a. Verify that there is only one NP1 in either slot 1 or slot 2 (the NP slots).
b. Verify that the StnBy LED on the NP1 is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
6. Insert an NP2 into the unused NP slot (temporarily making it the standby NP), as
follows:
a. Ensure that the left and right card ejectors on the NP2 are lifted.
b. At the front of the switch, align the NP2 with the card guides and carefully
slide it into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors.
c. Depress the card ejectors simultaneously.
d. Slide the ejector lock to the right.
e. Tighten the thumbscrews located on the left and right of the NP2.

Note – Although a torque driver is not supplied in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch accessory kit, it is recommended that, when tightening thumbscrews with a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, a maximum of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque should be used.

7. Wait until the standby NP2’s StnBy LED is blinking green and the active NP1’s
StnBy LED is solid green. This may take approximately 10 to 30 minutes
(depending on the currently loaded NP2 software, size of the routing tables,
number of line cards, and configuration).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-7


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

Note – The status of the currently loaded NP2 software determines the copy
operations that occur as follows:
• If the NP2 already has a prior release of the software loaded, the NP2 comes
up in a marginal state.
• If the NP2 has the same application (npn.rom) and bootflash (npnboot.rom) as
the NP1, only the configuration files are copied from the NP1 (and not the line
card images.)
• If the NP2 has no bootflash (blank disk), the NP1 copies its bootflash through
the backchannel to the NP2. All other software is copied through the switch
fabric onto the NP2.
• If the NP2 has only a bootflash, the NP2 loads the bootflash and then copies
all of the software from the NP1 to the NP2 disk.

8. Verify that the card state is active by using the show card state console command.
The display should indicate that slot 1 and slot 2 are both active as shown in the
following example:
show card state
Card State
1 Active
2 Active
3 Active
4 Active
5 Active
6 Active
7 Active
8 Active
9 Active
10 Active

9-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

11 Active
12 Active
13 Active
14 Active
15 Active
16 Active
9. Using NavisCore, perform the following steps to set the node processor
redundancy:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.
d. Select the NP module slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel and
double-click the left mouse button. The Set Card Attributes dialog box
appears.
e. Set the Redundancy field to Redundant in the Set Card Attributes dialog box.
f. Select OK.
10. Ensure that the active card has redundancy enabled. To do this, use the show
system console command as shown in the following example.
show system
Switch Name: GX-550-2
System Desc: Lucent Technologies, Inc. GX 550
Model: GX-550
Location:
Contact:
System State: Active
Uptime: 7 minutes 35 seconds

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-9


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

Current time: Tue Mar 04 23:43:48 2003 UTC


Serial Number: 47A11151 Internal IP Addr:
175.200.200.2
Hardware Rev: 09 Ethernet IP Addr:
10.200.200.2
EPROM Rev: 01.00.00.00 Network Wide Addr:
175.200.0.0
Software Rev: 08.01.00.05 Network Mask:
255.255.0.0
Ethernet Addr: 00:60:D1:80:03:B1 Active File Set: A
NP Redundancy: Enabled NP Mode: Normal
11. If the NP2 currently has no bootflash loaded, proceed to step 15 on page 9-11. (If
the NP2 has no bootflash, the NP1 automatically copies its bootflash through the
backchannel to the NP2. All other software is copied through the switch fabric
onto the NP2.)
Note that if the NP Redundancy field indicates a value of Enabled, the bootflash
is loaded. If the NP2 does have existing bootflash, wait for the configuration files
to be copied from the active NP1 to the standby NP2 (approximately 30 minutes)
and verify it by using the show copy command from the switch console.
12. Using NavisCore, perform the following steps to download the new GX switch
code:
a. From the NavisCore map, highlight the switch you want to upgrade.(For
details on logging on to NavisCore see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Getting
Started User’s Guide.)
b. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Switches ŸDownload Switch
Software. The Download Switch Software dialog box appears.
c. Select the appropriate switch code.
d. Set the No Cold Boot After Download option.
e. Select the appropriate set to Overwrite (either set A or set B).
f. Select OK.

9-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

13. Use the show copy console command to verify that the configuration files have
been copied.The copy operation is complete when the system displays the
following message after you enter the show copy command:
Configuration Initialization States
Toggle Lockout Period is inactive.
Standby is not copying files

Note – Do not proceed until the output from the show copy command indicates that
the configuration files have been copied; otherwise, the configuration files will be
corrupted during the NP switchover.

Re-issue the show copy command approximately every 5 minutes, to monitor the
progress of the copying.

14. Reset the standby card from the console by using the reset card console command
as shown in the following example:
reset card slot-number
Where slot-number is the slot number for the standby card. (Use the show system
command to verify the slot number for the standby card.)
The reset card command resets the specified card and performs the following
functions:
• Checks to verify that redundancy is enabled
• Checks to verify whether the card is in the process of loading, bootstrapping,
warm booting, or synchronization
• Checks to verify whether the PRAM files are copied to the standby
15. Verify that the card state has a status of active. Display the card state status by
using the show card state console command. Note that as the switch code is
loading, the system will display a card state status of loading. Once the switch
code is loaded, the card indicates a status of active.
16. Force an NP switchover so that the standby NP2 that you just inserted becomes
the active NP and the NP1 becomes the standby NP. You can use either the
console or NavisCore to force this switchover.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-11


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

Using the Console to Force the Switchover


Enter the following console command:
toggle card slot number
Where slot number is the number that identifies the slot that contains the
card.

Using NavisCore to Force the Switchover


1. Use the following steps to force the switchover:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch. (For
detailed information about the switch back panel see the B-STDX, CBX, and
GX Getting Started User’s Guide.)
d. Select the NP module slot (labeled NPA) on the switch back panel.
(Note: selecting an NP also selects the switching fabric and timing modules.
You can verify the attributes for the NP module that you have selected by
double-clicking on the slot.)
e. From the Actions menu on the Switch Back Panel dialog box, select
Switch to Redundant Unit.
f. Choose Go. The NavisCore SwitchOver dialog box appears.
g. Select Node Processor (NP).
h. Choose OK. The standby NP2 becomes the active NP and the NP1 becomes
the standby NP.
i. Wait for the NP2 to become the active NP (as shown by the module’s LED).

9-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

2. Change the console port speed for the terminal session to 115,200 bits per second,
for the reasons described in the following note.

Note – For the Pentium boards on the NP2, the console speed is 115,200 bps. For the
NP1, the console speed is 19,200 bps. With a switchover from an NP1 to an NP2, the
console speed must be increased; otherwise unintelligible characters appear on the
screen.

The console session becomes inoperable during an NP switchover between NP1s and
NP2s. You can re-establish the session by changing the console port speed, as
appropriate.

3. By default, NavisCore regards the NP2 that you just inserted to be an NP1, so you
must explicitly set it to be a non-redundant NP2 within NavisCore, as follows:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. From the Misc menu, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon. Enter your operator
password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.
d. Select the NP slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel and
double-click the left mouse button. The Set Card Attributes dialog box
appears.
e. Set the Card Type field to Node Processor 2.
f. Set the Redundancy field to Stand Alone, and verify that the other fields are
set correctly (see Table 9-1 on page 9-25).
g. Choose OK to save the attributes or choose Cancel to exit from the dialog
box. The Switch Back Panel dialog box reappears. If you selected OK, the
Switch Back Panel dialog box displays the configured NP.
4. Remove the standby NP1, as follows:
a. Put on the antistatic wrist strap and plug it into one of the ESD grounding
jacks on the switch (see Figure 9-1 on page 9-6).
b. Verify that the StnBy LED is blinking green on the NP1 that you want to
remove — this indicates that it is the standby NP.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-13


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2 in a Non-Redundant Configuration

c. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the


left and right of the NP1.
d. Slide the ejector lock to the left to disconnect the NP1 from the switch.
e. Lift the left and right card ejectors simultaneously to disengage the NP1 from
the switch.
f. Slide the NP1 out of the switch, and place it in an antistatic container.
5. Re-install the front bezel that covers the NP and SF modules.

9-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
NP Redundancy

NP Redundancy
Redundant NP modules (active and standby) monitor each other's integrity through
the use of a keep-alive protocol. A redundancy manager in each NP exchanges
keep-alive messages over the cell bus.

The redundancy scheme provides a fault-tolerant system. If an NP fails, the


switchover to the standby NP does not cause a loss of data, because data is transferred
through the SF, and the Virtual Network Navigator (VNN) routing tables reside on the
BIOs.

For detailed information about how to monitor an NP module, see the B-STDX, CBX,
and GX Switch Diagnostics User’s Guide.

Active NP Failure
If the standby NP detects a failure in the active NP:
1. The standby NP disables the active NP and performs a warm boot to become the
active NP.
2. The new active NP isolates the failed NP, using special redundancy hardware.
3. The new active NP keeps the old active NP isolated until it is fully booted up.

When the old active NP finishes booting, it then acts as the standby NP and begins to
send keep-alive polls to the new active module.

Standby NP Failure
If the active NP detects any failure in the standby NP, it disables and isolates the
standby NP and reports the problem to the NMS.

PRAM Synchronization
• Both SNMP and TFTP mechanisms are used to keep the PRAM of redundant NP
modules synchronized.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-15


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

• All PRAM downloads go to the active NP module. After the active NP receives a
new PRAM, it downloads the new PRAM to its redundant partner.
• The active NP monitors the PRAM in the standby NP and automatically
downloads the PRAM if a mismatch is detected.

Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant


Configuration
Caution – During NP upgrades, the NP2 can be configured as a redundant (standby)
! NP for an NP1, but an NP1 cannot be configured as a standby NP for an NP2.

For redundant NP configurations, upgrading from NP1s to NP2s consists of the


following tasks:
• Replacing the redundant (standby) NP1 by an NP2
• Forcing an NP switchover to the NP2
• Replacing the remaining NP1 by another NP2

These tasks are described in detail, as follows:


1. Verify that the minimum version of software for NP2 support is installed
(see “Minimum Software Versions” on page 9-3.)
2. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into one
of the ESD grounding jacks on the switch (see Figure 9-1 on page 9-6).
3. Remove the bezel that covers the NP and SF modules on the front of the switch.
4. Verify that the three DIP switches on the installed NP1s, and on the NP2s that you
want to install, are set to the default recommended mode of operation, in which all
are set to the ON (up) position.
5. On the front of the switch, verify that the NP configuration is redundant, as
follows:
a. Verify that there are NP1s in both of slots 1 and 2 (the NP slots).

9-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

b. Verify that the StnBy LED is blinking green on one of the NPs (to indicate the
standby NP), and solid green on the other NP (to indicate the active NP).
6. Remove the standby NP1 as follows:
a. Put on the antistatic wrist strap and plug it into one of the ESD grounding
jacks on the switch
(see Figure 9-1 on page 9-6).
b. Verify that the StnBy LED is blinking green on the NP1 that you want to
remove — this indicates that it is the standby NP.
c. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the
left and right of the standby NP1.
d. Slide the ejector lock to the left to disconnect the standby NP1 from the
switch.
e. Lift the left and right card ejectors simultaneously to disengage the standby
NP1 from the switch.
f. Slide the standby NP1 out of the switch, and place it in an antistatic container.
7. Wait until the active NP1’s StnBy LED is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
8. Insert an NP2 into the unused NP slot — making it the standby NP, as follows:
a. Ensure that the left and right card ejectors on the NP2 are lifted.
b. At the front of the switch, align the NP2 with the card guides and carefully
slide it into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors.
c. Depress the card ejectors simultaneously.
d. Slide the ejector lock to the right.
e. Tighten the thumbscrews located on the left and right of the NP2. Although a
torque driver is not supplied in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
accessory kit, it is recommended that, when tightening thumbscrews with a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, a maximum of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque should
be used.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-17


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

9. Wait until the Standby NP2’s Standby LED is blinking green and the active NP1’s
Standby LED is solid green. This may take approximately 20-30 minutes
(depending on the currently loaded NP2 software, size of the routing tables,
number of line cards, and configuration).
10. Ensure that the active card has redundancy enabled. To do this, use the show
system console command. The following example illustrates the use of this
command.
show system
Switch Name: GX-550-2
System Desc: Lucent Technologies, Inc. GX 550
Model: GX-550
Location:
Contact:
System State: Active
Uptime: 7 minutes 35 seconds
Current time: Tue Mar 04 23:43:48 2003 UTC
Serial Number: 47A11151 Internal IP Addr:
175.200.200.2
Hardware Rev: 09 Ethernet IP Addr:
10.200.200.2
EPROM Rev: 01.00.00.00 Network Wide Addr:
175.200.0.0
Software Rev: 08.01.00.05 Network Mask:
255.255.0.0
Ethernet Addr: 00:60:D1:80:03:B1 Active File Set: A
NP Redundancy: Enabled
NP Redundancy: Enabled NP Mode: Normal

9-188/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

11. Using NavisCore, perform the following steps to download the new GX switch
code:
a. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore ŸLogon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
b. From the NavisCore map, highlight the switch you want to upgrade.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch. (For
detailed information about the switch back panel see the B-STDX, CBX, and
GX Getting Started User’s Guide.)
d. Select the NP module slot (labeled NPA) on the switch back panel.
(Note: selecting an NP also selects the switching fabric and timing modules.
You can verify the attributes for the NP module that you have selected by
double-clicking on the slot.)
e. Set the No Cold Boot After Download option.
f. Select the appropriate set to Overwrite (either set A or set B).
g. Select OK.
12. Wait for the configuration to be copied from the active NP1 to the standby NP2
(approximately 30 minutes).
13. Use the show copy console command to verify that the configuration files have
been copied.The copy operation is complete when the system displays the
following message after you enter the show copy command:
Configuration Initialization States
Toggle Lockout Period is inactive.
Standby is not copying files

Caution – Do not proceed until the output from the show copy command indicates
! that the configuration files have been copied; otherwise, the configuration files will be
corrupted during the NP switchover.

Re-issue the show copy command approximately every 5 minutes, to monitor the
progress of the copying.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-19


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

14. Reset the standby card from the console by using the reset card console command
as shown in the following example:
reset card card-number
This command resets the specified card and performs the following functions:
• Checks to verify that redundancy is enabled
• Checks to verify whether the card is in the process of loading, bootstrapping,
warm booting, or synchronization
• Checks to verify whether the PRAM files are copied to the standby
15. Verify that the card state has a status of active. Display the card state status by
using the show card state console command. Note that as the switch code is
loading, the system will display a card state status of loading. Once the switch
code is loaded, the card indicates a status of active.
16. Force an NP switchover so that the standby NP2 that you just inserted becomes
the active NP and the NP1 becomes the standby NP. You can use either the
console or NavisCore to force this switchover.

Using the Console to Force the Switchover


Enter the following console command:
toggle card slot number
Where slot number is the number that identifies the slot that contains the
card.

Using NavisCore to Force the Switchover


1. Use the following steps to use NavisCore (from a remote console) to force the
switchover:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch. (For
detailed information about the switch back panel see the B-STDX, CBX, and
GX Getting Started User’s Guide.)

9-208/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

d. Select the NP module slot (labeled NPA) on the switch back panel.
(Note: selecting an NP also selects the switching fabric and timing modules.
You can verify the attributes for the NP module that you have selected by
double-clicking on the slot.)
e. From the Actions menu on the Switch Back Panel dialog box, select
Switch to Redundant Unit.
f. Choose Go. The NavisCore SwitchOver dialog box appears.
g. Select Node Processor (NP).
h. Choose OK. The standby NP2 becomes the active NP and the NP1 becomes
the standby NP.
i. Wait for the NP2 to become the active NP (as indicated by the module LED).
2. Change the console speed to 115,200 bits per second on your terminal session
device, for the reasons described in the following note:

Note – For the Pentium boards on the NP2, the console speed is 115,200 bps. For the
NP1, the console speed is 19,200 bps. With a switchover from an NP1 to an NP2, the
console speed must be increased; otherwise unintelligible characters appear on the
screen.

The console session becomes inoperable during an NP switchover between NP1s and
NP2s. You can re-establish the session by changing the console port speed, as
appropriate.

3. After the configuration files have been copied, if you use the show system
command from the switch console, the following message should appear: NP
Redundancy, Enabled.
4. By default, NavisCore regards the NP2 that you just inserted to be an NP1, so you
must explicitly set it to be an NP2 within NavisCore, as follows:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-21


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

d. Select the NP slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel and
double-click the left mouse button. The Set Card Attributes dialog box
appears.
e. Set the Card Type field to Node Processor 2 (and verify that the other fields
are set correctly as shown in Table 9-1).
f. Choose OK to save the attributes or choose Cancel to exit from the dialog
box. The Switch Back Panel dialog box reappears. If you selected OK, the
Switch Back Panel dialog box displays the configured NP.
5. Remove the standby NP1 as follows:
a. Put on the antistatic wrist strap and plug it into one of the ESD grounding
jacks on the switch
(see Figure 9-1 on page 9-6).
b. Verify that the StnBy LED is blinking green on the NP1 that you want to
remove — this indicates that it is the standby NP.
c. Using a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the thumbscrews located on the
left and right of the standby NP1.
d. Slide the ejector lock to the left to disconnect the standby NP1 from the
switch.
e. Lift the left and right card ejectors simultaneously to disengage the standby
NP1 from the switch.
f. Slide the standby NP1 out of the switch, and place it in an antistatic container.
6. Wait until the active NP2’s StnBy LED is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
7. Insert an NP2 into the unused NP slot — making it the standby NP, as follows:
a. Ensure that the left and right card ejectors on the NP2 are lifted.
b. At the front of the switch, align the NP2 with the card guides and carefully
slide it into the switch. Press firmly to ensure that it has engaged the
backplane connectors.
c. Depress the card ejectors simultaneously.
d. Slide the ejector lock to the right.

9-228/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

e. Tighten the thumbscrews located on the left and right of the NP2. Although a
torque driver is not supplied in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
accessory kit, it is recommended that, when tightening thumbscrews with a #2
Phillips-head screwdriver, a maximum of 6 to 8 inch-pounds of torque should
be used.
8. Wait until the standby NP2’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to
the right edge) is either sold green or slowly blinking green.
9. From the console use the show system command to ensure that Redundancy is
enabled.
10. Using NavisCore, perform the following steps to download the new GX switch
code:
a. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore ŸLogon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
b. From the NavisCore map, highlight the switch you want to upgrade.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Switches ŸDownload Switch
Software. The Download Switch Software dialog box appears.
d. Select the appropriate switch code.
e. Set the No Cold Boot After Download option.
f. Select the appropriate set to Overwrite (either set A or set B).
g. Select OK.
11. Use the show copy console command to verify that the configuration files have
been copied.The copy operation is complete when the system displays the
following message after you enter the show copy command:
Configuration Initialization States
Toggle Lockout Period is inactive.
Standby is not copying files

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-23


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

Note – Do not proceed until the output from the show copy command indicates that
the configuration files have been copied; otherwise, the configuration files will be
corrupted during the NP switchover.

Re-issue the show copy command approximately every 5 minutes, to monitor the
progress of the copying.

12. Reset the standby card from the console by using the reset card console command
as shown in the following example:
reset card card-number
This command resets the specified card and performs the following functions:
• Checks to verify that redundancy is enabled
• Checks to verify whether the card is in the process of loading, bootstrapping,
warm booting, or synchronization
• Checks to verify whether the PRAM files are copied to the standby
13. Verify that the card state has a status of active. Display the card state status by
using the show card state console command. Note that as the switch code is
loading, the system will display a card state status of loading. Once the switch
code is loaded, the card indicates a status of active.
14. Re-install the front bezel that covers the NP and SF modules.

Table 9-1 describes the Set Card Attributes fields for an NP module.

9-248/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Upgrading to NP2s in a Redundant Configuration

Table 9-1. Set Card Attributes Fields (NP Module)

Field Action/Description

Node Processor

Redundancy Select Stand Alone if you have a non-redundant NP configuration. Select


Redundant if you have a redundant NP installed in the switch.

Card Type Node Processor – (default) The original node processor, or NP1.
Node Processor 2 – The new node processor, or NP2.

Admin Status Select one of the following:


Up – (default) The NP module becomes fully operational when you start the
switch. To become operational, the module gets its application code from the
NP disk drive.
Down – The NP module does not come online when you start the switch. The
configuration is saved in the switch configuration table, but is not downloaded
to the switch. Use this option when running foreground diagnostics.
Maintenance – The NP module does not receive the application code when
you start the switch. A module in this state runs only from boot code. This
setting enables you to reset PRAM for a module that is failing to boot due to
invalid PRAM. You can also use this option to troubleshoot a possible
hardware problem.

Switching Fabric (SF) Module

Redundancy Select Stand Alone if you have a non-redundant SF configuration. Select


Redundant if you have a redundant SF installed in the switch.

Oper Status Displays the operational status of each SF module (SF1 and SF2) installed in
the GX 550 switch.

Timing Module (TM)

Redundancy Select Stand Alone if you have a non-redundant TM configuration. Select


Redundant if you have a redundant TM installed in the switch.

Oper Status Displays the operational status of each TM module (TM1 and TM2) installed
in the GX 550 witch.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-25


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Other Considerations

Other Considerations

Downgrading an NP2 to an NP1

Caution – After traffic stabilizes with more than 100 logical ports, physical ports, or
! trunks provisioned (or more than 100 hours of subscriber data) you cannot downgrade
an NP2 to an NP1 because the NP2 supports a much larger configuration database
than the NP1. With a smaller NP2 configuration database, it is possible to downgrade,
or backout to an NP1 configuration. See “Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the
NP2” on page 9-27 for more information.

Minimum Hardware Versions


Refer to the appropriate Software Release Notice (SRN) for information about the
interoperability among software revisions and minimum hardware revisions.
Additionally, must review the GX 550 SRN that is associated with the GX 550
Release you are using to familiarize yourself with any release-specific information
about the NP module.

Obsolete NP1 Software Image on the Standby NP


If an active NP2 detects an obsolete NP1 software image on the standby NP, the
standby NP will be inactivated and must be removed from the switch.

Obsolete NP1 Software Image on the Active NP


A switch that has obsolete NP1 software on the active NP and an NP2 as the standby
NP behaves as though both the active and standby NPs are NP1s. You must upgrade
the software on the active NP and reset the switch.

9-268/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2


Caution – If there are more than 100 logical ports, physical ports, or trunks
! provisioned (or more than 100 hours of subscriber data), Lucent recommends that you
do not attempt this backout procedure because the NP2 supports a much larger
configuration database than the NP1.

• Only a qualified customer or Lucent personnel should perform the procedures in


this document.
• This backout procedure requires the following tools and materials:
– A #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
– An antistatic wrist strap
– A console connection to the GX 550 switch
– Access to NavisCore
– One NP1 with preloaded software release (minimum 08.00.03.xx) for a
non-redundant configuration or
two NP1s with preloaded software release (minimum 08.00.03.xx) for a
redundant configuration

To revert back, or back-out to using NP1s after a previous upgrade to NP2s, perform
one of the following procedures, depending on whether the NP configuration is
non-redundant or redundant:
• “Backout Procedure for Non-Redundant Configuration” on page 9-28
• “Backout Procedure for Redundant Configuration” on page 9-31

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-27


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

Backout Procedure for Non-Redundant Configuration

Warning – Static electricity can damage the equipment. Wear an antistatic wrist strap
when handling any of the switch components. Connect it to one of the ESD grounding
jacks at the front or rear of the switch, as shown in Figure 9-1 on page 9-6.

For a non-redundant NP2 configuration, perform the following steps to revert back to
a non-redundant NP1 configuration:
1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into one
of the ESD grounding jacks on the switch (see Figure 9-1 on page 9-6).
2. Verify that you have an available NP1 with preloaded software release (minimum
08.00.03.xx).
3. Remove the bezel that covers the NP and SF modules on the front of the switch.
4. Verify that the three DIP switches on the installed NP2, and on the NP1 that you
want to install, are set to the default recommended mode of operation, in which all
are set to the ON (up) position.
5. On the front of the switch, verify that the NP configuration is non-redundant, as
follows:
a. Verify that there is only one NP2 in either slot 1 or slot 2 (the NP slots).
b. Verify that the StnBy LED on the NP2 is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
6. Insert the NP1 (loaded with a minimum of 08.00.03.xx software) into the unused
NP slot (temporarily making it the standby NP).
7. The standby NP1 loads the boot image and application image and copies the
configuration files from the active NP2.
Wait until the standby NP1’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to
the right edge) is either solid green or slowly blinking green. This may take
approximately 20-30 minutes (depending on the size of the routing tables, number
of line cards, and configuration).
8. Wait until the standby NP1’s StnBy LED is blinking green and the active NP2’s
StnBy LED is solid green — this indicates that there is NP redundancy.

9-288/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

9. Using NavisCore, perform the following steps to set the node processor
redundancy:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.
d. Select the NP module slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel and
double-click the left mouse button. The Set Card Attributes dialog box
appears.
e. Set the Redundancy field to Redundant in the Set Card Attributes dialog box.
f. Select OK.
10. Wait for the configuration files to be copied from the active NP2 to the standby
NP1 (approximately 20-30 minutes), and verify it by using the show copy
command from the switch console.

Caution – Do not proceed until the output from the show copy command indicates
! that the configuration files have been copied; otherwise, the configuration files will be
corrupted during the NP switchover.

Re-issue the show copy command approximately every 5 minutes, to monitor the
progress of the copying. The copying will be complete when the system replies with a
message stating that the standby is not copying any files.

11. After the configuration files have been copied, if you use the show system
command from the switch console, the following message should appear: NP
Redundancy, Enabled.
12. Force an NP switchover in which the standby NP1 that you just inserted becomes
the active NP and the NP2 becomes the standby NP, by entering the following
command at the remote console:
toggle card slot number
Where slot number is the number that identifies the slot that contains the
active NP.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-29


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

13. Change the console speed to 19,200 bits per second on your terminal session
device, for the reasons described in the following note:

Note – For the Pentium boards on the NP2, the console speed is 115,200 bps. For the
NP1, the console speed is 19,200 bps. Therefore, the backout from an NP2 to an NP1
requires that the console speed be decreased; otherwise unintelligible characters
appear on the screen.

The console session becomes inoperable during an NP switchover between NP1s and
NP2s. You can re-establish the session by changing the console port speed, as
appropriate.

14. Remove the standby NP2 (indicated by a blinking green StnBy LED) and place it
in an antistatic container.
15. Wait until the active NP1’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to the
right edge) is
solid green; this may take several minutes.
16. Wait until the active NP1’s StnBy LED is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
17. Verify in NavisCore that all fields are set correctly in the Set Card Attributes
dialog box, as follows:
a. Select the appropriate switch object from the NavisCore network map.
b. If you are not already logged on to NavisCore, select NavisCore Ÿ Logon
from the Misc menu, and enter your operator password.
c. From the Administer menu, select Lucent Parameters ŸSet Parameters.
The Switch Back Panel dialog box appears for the selected switch.
d. Select the NP slot (indicated by NPA) on the switch back panel and
double-click the left mouse button. The Set Card Attributes dialog box
appears.
e. Verify (or change if necessary) that the Card Type field is set to Node
Processor (for Node
Processor 1).

9-308/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

f. Verify that the Redundancy field is set to Stand Alone, and verify that all of
the other fields are set correctly (see Table 9-1 on page 9-25).
g. Choose OK to save the attributes or choose Cancel to exit from the dialog
box. The Switch Back Panel dialog box reappears. If you selected OK, the
Switch Back Panel dialog box displays the configured NP.
18. Re-install the front bezel that covers the NP and SF modules.

Backout Procedure for Redundant Configuration

Warning – Static electricity can damage the equipment. Wear an antistatic wrist strap
when handling any of the switch components. Connect it to one of the ESD grounding
jacks at the front or rear of the switch, as shown in Figure 9-1 on page 9-6.

For a redundant NP2 configuration, perform the following steps to revert back to a
redundant NP1 configuration.
1. Put on the antistatic wrist strap (provided in the accessory kit) and plug it into one
of the ESD grounding jacks on the switch (see Figure 9-1 on page 9-6).
2. Verify that you have two available NP1s with preloaded software release
(minimum 08.00.03.xx, see SRN for details).
3. Remove the bezel that covers the NP and SF modules on the front of the switch.
4. Verify that the three DIP switches on the installed NP2s, and on the NP1s that you
want to install, are set to the default recommended mode of operation, in which all
are set to the ON (up) position.
5. On the front of the switch, verify that the NP configuration is redundant, as
follows:
a. Verify that there are NP2s in both of slots 1 and 2 (the NP slots).
b. Verify that the StnBy LED is blinking green on one of the NPs (to indicate the
standby NP), and solid green on the other NP (to indicate the active NP).
6. Remove the standby NP2 (indicated by a blinking green StnBy LED) and place it
in an antistatic container.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-31


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

7. Wait until the active NP2’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to the
right edge) is solid green; this may take approximately 20-30 minutes (depending
on the size of the routing tables, number of line cards, and configuration), and the
yellow Marg. LED becomes lit.
8. Wait until the active NP2’s StnBy LED is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
9. Insert an NP1 (loaded with a minimum of 08.00.03.xx software) into the unused
NP slot — making it the standby NP).
10. The standby NP1 loads the boot image and application image and copies the
configuration files from the active NP2.
Wait until the standby NP1’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to
the right edge) is either solid green or slowly blinking green. This may take several
minutes.
11. Wait until the standby NP1’s StnBy LED is blinking green and the active NP2’s
StnBy LED is solid green — this indicates that there is NP redundancy.
12. Determine whether the configuration files have been copied from the active NP2
to the standby NP1 by using the show copy command from the switch console.

Caution – Do not proceed until the output from the show copy command indicates
! that the configuration files have been copied; otherwise, the configuration files will be
corrupted during the NP switchover.

Re-issue the show copy command approximately every 5 minutes, to monitor the
progress of the copying. The copying will be complete when the system replies with a
message stating that the standby is not copying any files.

13. After the configuration files have been copied, if you use the show system
command from the switch console, the following message should appear: NP
Redundancy, Enabled.
14. Force an NP switchover in which the standby NP1 that you just inserted (loaded
with an earlier version of the software) becomes the active NP and the NP2
becomes the standby NP, by entering the following command at the remote
console:
toggle card 1

9-328/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Upgrading the Node Processor
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

15. Change the console speed to 19,200 bits per second on your terminal session
device, for the reasons described in the following note:

Note – For the Pentium boards on the NP2, the console speed is 115,200 bps. For the
NP1, the console speed is 19,200 bps. Therefore, the backout from an NP2 to an NP1
requires that the console speed be decreased; otherwise unintelligible characters
appear on the screen.

The console session becomes inoperable during an NP switchover between NP1s and
NP2s. You can re-establish the session by changing the console port speed, as
appropriate.

16. Remove the standby NP2 (indicated by a blinking green StnBy LED) and place it
in an antistatic container.
17. Wait until the active NP1’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to the
right edge) is solid green; this may take several minutes.
18. Wait until the active NP1’s StnBy LED is off — this indicates that there is no
standby NP installed.
19. Insert an NP1 (loaded with a minimum of 08.00.03.xx software) into the unused
NP slot — making it the standby NP).
20. The standby NP1 loads the boot image and application image and copies the
configuration files from the active NP1.
Wait until the standby NP1’s Good LED (the LED for module status, nearest to
the right edge) is either solid green or slowly blinking green. This may take several
minutes.
21. Wait until the standby NP1’s StnBy LED is blinking green and the active NP1’s
StnBy LED is solid green — this indicates that there is NP redundancy.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/049-33


Upgrading the Node Processor
Beta Draft Confidential
Backout Procedure After Upgrading to the NP2

22. Determine whether the configuration files have been copied from the active NP1
to the standby NP1 by using the show copy command from the switch console.

Caution – Do not proceed until the output from the show copy command indicates
! that the configuration files have been copied; otherwise, the configuration files will be
corrupted during the NP switchover.

Re-issue the show copy command approximately every 5 minutes, to monitor the
progress of the copying. The copying will be complete when the system replies with a
message stating that the standby is not copying any files.

23. After the configuration files have been copied, if you use the show system
command from the switch console, the following message should appear:

NP Redundancy, Enabled.
24. Re-install the front bezel that covers the NP and SF modules.

9-348/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

10
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides general troubleshooting information for the GX 550
Multiservice WAN switch. Unless otherwise noted, this chapter addresses only
hardware problems and their most probable solutions. If you suspect software
problems, see the troubleshooting information in the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch
Troubleshooting Guide.

This chapter includes the following topics:


• Power-up Diagnostics for the Node Processor and Base Input/Output Modules
• Switch Troubleshooting
• BIO Module Troubleshooting

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/0410-1


Troubleshooting
Beta Draft Confidential
Power-up Diagnostics for the Node Processor and Base Input/Output Modules

Power-up Diagnostics for the Node Processor


and Base Input/Output Modules
The following sections describe how power-up diagnostics work, the equipment
required to display power-up diagnostic results, and how to run and display power-up
diagnostics for a module.

Power-up Diagnostics Overview


If power-up diagnostics detect an error in a module, the module shuts down and the
Failed module status LED comes on. If no errors are detected, the system software
executes and brings the module up.

Equipment Requirements
To display the status of any node processor (NP) or base input/output (BIO) module’s
power-up diagnostics, connect a console terminal to the diagnostic port located on the
module’s front panel. Use the diagnostics cable provided in the accessory kit.

Enabling and Displaying Power-Up Diagnostics


Enabling and displaying power-up diagnostics depends on the setting of the
two-position DIP switches located on the front of the NP and BIO modules.

Figure 10-1 shows the locations of the three DIP switches on an NP module. These are
the same for the NP1 and for the NP2, which is described in Chapter 8. The DIP
switches are horizontally aligned and numbered as 1 to 3 from left-to-right (with
toggling switch movement on-off, from top-to-bottom).

DIP switches

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Figure 10-1. DIP Switches on Node Processor Module

10-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Troubleshooting
Power-up Diagnostics for the Node Processor and Base Input/Output Modules

Figure 10-2 shows the locations of the three DIP switches on a BIO module. These are
the same for the BIO1 and for the BIO2. The DIP switches are vertically aligned and
numbered as 1 to 3 from top-to-bottom (with toggling switch movement on-off, from
left-to-right).

DIP switches

Good
Failed

Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

Figure 10-2. DIP Switches on BIO Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/0410-3


Troubleshooting
Beta Draft Confidential
Power-up Diagnostics for the Node Processor and Base Input/Output Modules

Table 10-1 describes the results of all possible DIP switch settings (and illustrates the
vertical DIP switch alignment for BIO1 or BIO2 modules).

Note – DIP switch 3 is reserved for future use. Its setting (ON or OFF) does not
currently affect the outcome of the DIP switch settings.

Table 10-1. DIP Switch Settings

DIP DIP DIP Results


Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3

ON ON ON Power-up diagnostics run, but the


results are not displayed on the
1
console terminal. This mode is the
2
normal default and recommended
3
mode of operation.

OFFa ON ON Power-up diagnostics run, and the


results are displayed on the console
1
terminal.
2
3

ON OFFa ON Power-up diagnostics run, and the


results are displayed on the console
1
terminal.
2
3

OFFa OFFa ON Power-up diagnostics are bypassed,


and the system debugger is accessible
1
on the console terminal for Lucent
2
Technical Support personnel.
3

a OFF settings on the NP module prevent it from rebooting failed BIO modules.

10-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Troubleshooting
Switch Troubleshooting

Node Processor Reboot of BIO Modules


When the first two DIP switches on the front of the NP module are both in the ON (top)
position, the NP module polls the slots on the switch to verify the operation of all
modules. If the NP module polling mechanism detects a failure in a BIO module slot,
it reboots the module. However, if either of the first two positions on the NP module
DIP switch is in the OFF (bottom) position, the NP cannot reboot failed modules.

Switch Troubleshooting
Table 10-2 describes switch problems, possible causes, and recommended solutions.
Table 10-2. Switch Troubleshooting

Problem Cause(s) Solution

Marg. LED A fan module or BIO Check the status LEDs on the fan
(yellow) on NP module has failed. modules and BIO modules. If you detect
remains solid. a failure, replace the failed module.
There is a No configuration is present Determine whether there is a
marginal error in the NP module. configuration in the NP module (use the
condition on the NMS or a management console). If there
switch. is no configuration, download the
configuration, as described in the
B-STDX, CBX, and GX ATM Services
Configuration Guide.

Switch status The operating system (OS) The NMS operator must check the
Failed LED (red) is corrupt. switch and download the OS. For
on NP remains instructions, see the appropriate
solid. switch-code software release notice.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/0410-5


Troubleshooting
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Troubleshooting

Table 10-2. Switch Troubleshooting (Continued)

Problem Cause(s) Solution

Switch One or more BIO module Ensure that all BIO module ejector locks
continually ejector locks are in reset are fully up and locked. See the section,
reboots. mode. “Base Input/Output (BIO) Module” in
Chapter 7.
Bad or corrupt OS. The NMS operator must check the
switch and download the OS. For
instructions, see the appropriate
switch-code software release notice.
The NP module’s hard Check the module status LEDs on the
drive is not working. NP. If the NP module has failed, replace
the module.

Figure 10-3 shows the switch and module status LED locations on an NP1 module.
These locations are the same on the NP2, which is described in Chapter 8, “Node
Processor 2 (NP2)”.
Switch Status LED: Good
Module Status LED: Good
Switch Status LED: Marg.

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Status LED: StnBy


Switch Status LED: Failed Module Status LED: Failed

Figure 10-3. NP Module’s Switch and Status LEDs

10-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Troubleshooting
BIO Module Troubleshooting

BIO Module Troubleshooting


Table 10-3 describes BIO problems indicated by the BIO1 or BIO2 module’s status
LEDs (see Figure 10-4 on page 10-8), and also includes possible causes and solutions.
Table 10-3. BIO Module Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

No LEDs are lit The DIP switch on the BIO Check the position of the DIP switch on
on the module. module may be in debug the module. If all positions are OFF
mode (all positions are set to (left), change at least one of the first
OFF). two to the ON (right) position
(see Table 10-1 on page 10-4).

All LEDs on the One of the following Check the ejector lock slide located at
module remain conditions exists: the top of the module and ensure that it
solid. is fully up and locked. See the section,
• The module is in reset
“Base Input/Output (BIO) Module” in
mode.
Chapter 7.
• The module failed its
If all LEDs remain solid, replace the
internal CPU diagnostics.
affected module and contact the
• The i960 boot PROM, Technical Assistance Center (TAC)
8031 boot PROM, or (see page xxxv in the preface, “About
processor failed, is loose, This Guide.”)
or is missing.

Failed LED Power up diagnostics Replace the affected module, and


(red) remains detected a fatal error on the contact the TAC (see page xxxv in the
solid. BIO module. preface, “About This Guide.”)

Figure 10-4 on page 10-8 shows the locations of the BIO1 or BIO2 module’s status
and port alarm LEDs.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/0410-7


Troubleshooting
Beta Draft Confidential
BIO Module Troubleshooting

Switch Status LED: Good

Good
Failed

Switch Status LED: Failed

Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

5
6
Port Alarm LEDs 7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

Diag. Port

ATM BIO
125

Figure 10-4. BIO Module LEDs

10-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

A
Module Specifications
This appendix provides technical information and specifications for the following
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch modules:
• ATM Base Input/Output 1 Module
• ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module
• Node Processor Module (NP1 and NP2)
• Switch Fabric Module
• OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module
• OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module
• OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module
• GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module
• Node Processor Adapter Module
• Timing Module
• Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3)
• Base Input/Output Fan Tray (No. 4)
• Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2)
• Timing Module/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)
• AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit
• DC Input Power Protection Unit

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-1


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
ATM Base Input/Output 1 Module

ATM Base Input/Output 1 Module


The ATM base input/output 1 (BIO1) module provides ATM Layer Processing for
four independent 622 Mbps cell threads. Each ATM BIO1 thread interfaces cells to or
from a physical interface (phy) module and to or from the switching fabric port. A phy
module can be either a quad OC-3c/STM-1 or a single OC-12c/STM-4 module on a
per-thread basis, or an OC-48/STM-16 module on a per-ATM BIO1 basis.

Except for minor variations in temperature range and power requirements, the
specifications for the BIO2 module are the same as for the BIO1 module.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 22 in. (55.9 cm)

Width: 1.7 in. (4.3 cm)

Depth: 14.5 in. (36.8 cm)

Weight: 6 lbs.

Power Requirements

90 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 55qC (32qto 131qF)

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)

A-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
ATM Base Input/Output 1 Module

• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)


• UL 1950 3rd edition

Standards
• ANSI: T1.231
• ITU: G.783, I.371, I.610, Q.701-Q.710, Q.2100, Q.2110, Q.2130, Q.2140,
Q.2610, Q.2724, Q.2761-Q.2764, Q.2722, Q.2931, Q.2971
• ATM Forum: UNI 3.0, UNI 3.1, UNI 4.0, ILMI 3.0, IISP, PNNI 1.0, B-ICI 1.1,
TM 4.0
• Bellcore: GR-253, TR-474, GR-1100, GR-1110, GR-1248, GR-1343
• IETF: RFC 1595

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-3


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
ATM Base Input/Output 1 Module

Front View

Figure A-1 shows a front view of the ATM BIO Module.

Good
Failed

Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

Diag. Port

ATM BIO
125

Figure A-1. ATM Base Input/Output Module

A-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module

ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module


The BIO2 module provides ATM layer processing for four independent cell threads.
Each cell thread provides 1 million cells for input buffering and 1 million cells for
output buffering. Each thread interfaces cells to or from a physical interface (phy)
module and to or from the switching fabric port.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 22 in. (55.9 cm)

Width: 1.7 in. (4.3 cm)

Depth: 14.5 in. (36.8 cm)

Weight: 6 lbs. (2.72 kg)

Power Requirements

100 watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• UL 1950 3rd edition

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-5


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module

Standards
• ANSI: T1.231
• ITU: G.783, I.371, I.610, Q.701-Q.710, Q.2100, Q.2110, Q.2130, Q.2140,
Q.2610, Q.2724, Q.2761-Q.2764, Q.2722, Q.2931, Q.2971
• ATM Forum: UNI 3.0, UNI 3.1, UNI 4.0, ILMI 3.0, IISP, PNNI 1.0, B-ICI 1.1,
TM 4.0
• Bellcore: GR-253, TR-474, GR-1100, GR-1110, GR-1248, GR-1343
• IETF: RFC 1595

Front View

Figure A-2 on page A-7 shows the front view of the BIO2 module.

A-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module

Good LED

Good
Failed

Failed LED

DIP Switches

Alarms
Yel Red
1
2
3
4
Port Alarm LEDs 5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16

Diagnostics Port Diag.

USB Port USB

ITP
ITP Port

ATM BIO II

Figure A-2. BIO2 Module - Front View

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-7


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Module (NP1 and NP2)

Node Processor Module (NP1 and NP2)


The node processor NP module (NP1 and NP2) is the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch control board. It is responsible for system control and management. The
operating specifications for both versions of the NP (NP1 and NP2) are the same,
except for the physical connectors. See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for
information about the NP2 node processor.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 1.6 in. (4.1 cm)

Width: 16 in. (40.6 cm)

Depth: 14.5 (36.8 cm)

Weight: 4.8 lb

Power Requirements

40 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)

A-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Node Processor Module (NP1 and NP2)

• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)


• UL 1950 3rd edition

Physical Connectors
• DB9 RS232 diagnostic port for the original node processor (NP1)
• RJ45 RS232 diagnostic port for the NP2

Front View

Figure A-3 shows a front view of the NP1 module.

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Figure A-3. Node Processor Module (NP1)

Figure A-4 shows a front view of the NP2 module. See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2
(NP2)” for information about the NP2 node processor.

Node Processor 2
NP 2 Diag.
ITP Good
Marg.
Failed Good
Stand Failed
By

Figure A-4. Node Processor Module 2 (NP2)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-9


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric Module

Switch Fabric Module


The switch fabric (SF) module provides non-blocked, source-routed cell switching of
up to 25 Gbps.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 1.6 in. (4.1 cm)

Width: 16 in. (40.6 cm)

Depth: 14.5 in. (36.8 cm)

Weight: 5.8 lb

Power Requirements

130 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• UL 1950 3rd edition

A-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Switch Fabric Module

Front View

Figure A-5 shows a front view of the switch fabric module.

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Figure A-5. Switch Fabric Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-11


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module

OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module


The OC-3c/STM-1 physical interface (phy) module provides the OC-3 physical
interconnection of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and the network, and
provides the physical layer functions for SONET/SDH ATM applications.

This phy module provides the physical media dependent (PMD) and transmission
convergence (TC) sublayer functionality prior to the ATM layer processing performed
by the BIO1 or BIO2 module.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 11.25 in. (28.6 cm)

Width: .9 in. (2.2 cm)

Depth: 5.5 in. (14 cm)

Weight: 1.1 lb

Power Requirements

15 Watts

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)

A-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module

• NEBS GR-63-CORE, GR-1089-CORE


• UL 1950 3rd edition

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32q to 122qF)

SONET Standards
• ATM Forum UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0
• ATM Forum AF-PHY-004600
• ANSI T1.105
• ANSI T1.106
• ANSI T1.231
• ANSI T1.646
• Bellcore TR-NWT-001112
• Bellcore GR-253-CORE
• RFC SONET 1595

SDH Standards
• ATM Forum UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0
• ITU G.707
• ITU G.708
• ITU G.709
• ITU G.783
• ITU G.957

Physical Interfaces

Four ATM cell-bearing OC-3/STM-1 (155.52 Mbps) ports (optical)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-13


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module

Physical Connectors

Subscriber Connectors (SC)

Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode IR [Laser] Optics)


• Up to 15 kilometers
• TX Power: -8dBm, -15dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -8dBm, -28dBm
• Loss Budget: 0–12 dB

Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode LR [Laser] Optics)


• Up to 40 kilometers
• TX Power: -0dBm, -5dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -10dBm, -34dBm
• Loss Budget: 10–28 dB

Signal Distance/Levels (Multimode [LED] Optics)


• Up to 2 kilometers
• TX Power: -14dBm, -20dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -14dBm, -30dBm
• Loss Budget: 0–10 dB

A-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module

Front View

Figure A-6 shows front views of the three types of OC-3c/STM-1 phy modules.

Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx Rx
OC3 OC3 OC3
STM1 STM1 STM1
PHY PHY PHY
IR LR MM

Singlemode IR Singlemode LR Multimode

Figure A-6. OC-3c/STM-1 Phy Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-15


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module

OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module


The OC-12c/STM-4 physical interface (phy) module provides the OC-12 physical
interconnection of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and the network, and
provides the physical layer functions for SONET/SDH ATM applications.

This phy module provides the physical medium dependent (PMD) and transmission
convergence (TC) sublayer functionality prior to the ATM layer processing performed
by the BIO1 or BIO2 module.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 11.25 in. (28.6 cm)

Width: .9 in (2.2 cm)

Depth: 5.5 in (14 cm)

Weight: 1.1 lb

Power Requirements

15 Watts

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)

A-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module

• NEBS GR-63-CORE, GR-1089-CORE


• UL 1950 3rd edition

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32q to 122qF)

SONET Standards
• ATM Forum UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0
• ATM Forum AF-PHY-004600
• ANSI T1.105
• ANSI T1.106
• ANSI T1.231
• ANSI T1.646
• Bellcore TR-NWT-001112
• Bellcore GR-253-CORE
• RFC SONET 1595

SDH Standards
• ATM Forum UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0
• ITU G.707
• ITU G.708
• ITU G.709
• ITU G.783
• ITU G.957

Physical Interfaces

ATM cell-bearing OC-12/STM-4 (622.08 Mbps) port

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-17


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module

Physical Connectors

Subscriber Connector (SC)

Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode IR [Laser] Optics)


• Up to 15 kilometers
• TX Power: -8dBm, -15dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -8dBm, -28dBm
• Loss Budget: 0–12 dB

Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode LR [Laser] Optics)


• Up to 40 kilometers
• TX Power: +2dBm, -3dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -8dBm, -28dBm
• Loss Budget: 10–24 dB

Signal Distance/Levels (Multimode [LED] Optics)


• Up to 500 meters
• TX Power: -14dBm, -20dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -14dBm, -26dBm
• Loss Budget: 0–6 dB

A-188/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module

Front View

Figure A-7 shows front views of the three types of OC-12c/STM-4 phy modules.

Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

OC12 OC12 OC12


STM4 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY
IR LR MM

Singlemode IR Singlemode LR Multimode

Figure A-7. OC-12c/STM-4 Phy Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-19


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module

OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module


The OC-48/STM-16 physical interface (phy) module provides the OC-48 physical
interconnection of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and the network, and
provides the physical layer functions for SONET/SDH ATM applications.

This phy module provides the physical medium dependent (PMD) and transmission
convergence (TC) sublayer functionality prior to the ATM layer processing performed
by the BIO1 or BIO2 module.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 22.5 in. (57.15 cm)

Width: 1.8 in (4.58 cm)

Depth: 5.5 in. (14 cm)

Weight: 4.4 lb

Power Requirements

30 Watts

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)

A-208/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module

• NEBS GR-63-CORE, GR-1089-CORE


• UL 1950 3rd edition

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32q to 122qF)

SONET Standards
• ATM Forum UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0
• ANSI T1.105
• ANSI T1.106
• ANSI T1.231
• ANSI T1.646
• Bellcore GR-253-CORE
• RFC SONET 1595

SDH Standards
• ATM Forum UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0
• ITU G.707
• ITU G.708
• ITU G.709
• ITU G.783
• ITU G.957

Physical Interfaces

ATM cell-bearing OC-48/STM-16 (2.488 Gbps) port

Physical Connectors

Subscriber Connector (SC)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-21


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module

Signal Distance/Levels (Singlemode IR [Laser] Optics)


• Up to 15 kilometers
• TX Power: 0dBm, -5dBm
• RX Sensitivity: 0dBm, -18dBm
• Loss Budget: 0–12 dB

A-228/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module

Front View

Figure A-8 shows a front view of the OC-48/STM-16 phy module.

Good
Fail

Tx

Rx

OC48
STM16
PHY
IR

Figure A-8. OC-48/STM-16 Phy Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-23


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module


Note – Read the applicable GX 550 switch software release notice (SRN) to
determine whether the GX 550 ES is supported in your current release.

The GX 550 ES downlink physical interface (phy) module is a physical layer card that
plugs into the GX 550’s ATM BIO module via the backplane. It provides the Utopia II
high-speed bus connection to the GX 550 ES via a 1.0368 Gbps serial thread.

The GX 550 ES downlink phy module provides the timing, cell flow, and fault
monitoring for the GX 550 ES to support the transport modules on the GX 550 ES.
You can connect a maximum of four GX 550 ES downlink phy modules to one ATM
BIO1 or BIO2 module in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 11.25 in. (28.6 cm)

Width: .9 in. (2.2 cm)

Depth: 5.5 in. (14 cm)

Weight: 1.1 lbs.

Power Requirements

15 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

A-248/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• NEBS GR-63-CORE, GR-1089-CORE
• UL 1950 3rd edition

Signal Distance/Levels (Multimode [LED] Optics)


• Less than or equal to 100 meters
• TX Power: -8dBm, -15dBm
• RX Sensitivity: -8dBm, -28dBm
• Loss Budget: 0-12 dB

Physical Connector

Duplex subscriber connector (optical)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-25


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

Front View

Figure A-9 shows a front view of the GX 550 ES downlink phy module.

Good
Fail
Tx 1

Rx

DOWNLINK
PHY

Figure A-9. GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module

A-268/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Node Processor Adapter Module

Node Processor Adapter Module


The node processor adapter (NPA) module provides input/output connections to the
node processor module.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 1.6 in. (4.1 cm)

Width: 14.2 in. (36.1 cm)

Depth: 5.5 in. (14 cm)

Weight: 1 lb.

Power Requirements

10 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• FDA/CDRH Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• IEC 825-1 Class 1 (Laser Safety)
• UL 1950 3rd edition

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-27


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Adapter Module

Interface Standards

ITU G.703

Other Standards Supported

E-NET

IEEE 802.3 (10BASE-T)

Physical Connectors

RJ45 Ethernet port

DB-9 (female) network management port

DB-9 (male) external power alarm port

DB-26 alarm contacts

Three T1 wire-wrap pin connectors for timing input and output

Three E1 BNC connectors for timing input and output

Front View

Figure A-10 shows a front view of the node processor adapter (NPA) module.
NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGMT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT

Figure A-10. Node Processor Adapter Module

A-288/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Timing Module

Timing Module
The timing module contains the centralized physical interface (phy) timing sources for
the system, and distributes a timing (master) clock to the physical ports on the
backplane. The BIO/phy modules derive physical timing appropriate for the
transmission interface from the system clock. The timing module also provides power
to the fan trays.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 1.6 in. (4.1 cm)

Width: 14.2 in. (36.1 cm)

Depth: 5.5 in. (14 cm)

Weight: 1.6 lb

Power Requirements

10 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Agency Approvals
• EN55022 Class A (CISPR)
• EN50082-1
• EN61000-3.2, 3.3
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• UL 1950 3rd edition

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-29


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Timing Module

Timing and Synchronization Standards Supported


• Bellcore GR-1244-CORE
• ANSI T1.101

Front View

Figure A-11 shows a front view of the timing module.


Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Figure A-11. Timing Module

A-308/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3)

Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3)


The switch fabric/node processor (SF/NP) fan tray (Fan Tray No. 3) provides cooling
for the switch fabric and node processor modules.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 9.20 in. (23. 37 cm)

Width: 1.20 in. (3.05 cm)

Depth: 19.75 in. (50.17 cm)

Weight: 2 lb

Power Requirements

28 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-31


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric/Node Processor Fan Tray (No. 3)

Front View

Figure A-12 shows a front view of the SF/NP fan tray.

Figure A-12. SF/NP Fan Tray

A-328/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Base Input/Output Fan Tray (No. 4)

Base Input/Output Fan Tray (No. 4)


The base input/output (BIO) fan tray (Fan Tray No. 4) provides cooling for the BIO
modules.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 2 in. (5.08 cm)

Width: 17.3 in. (43.94 cm)

Depth: 14.2 in. (36.07 cm)

Weight: 9 lb

Power Requirements

95 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Front View

Figure A-13 shows a front view of the BIO fan tray.

Fan Status /Fan Tray No. 4

Figure A-13. BIO Fan Tray

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-33


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2)

Phy Modules Fan Tray (No. 2)


The physical interface (phy) modules fan tray (Fan Tray No. 2) provides cooling for
the phy modules.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 2.00 in. (5.08 cm)

Width: 14.20 in. (36.07 cm)

Depth: 5.25 in. (13.34 cm)

Weight: 5 lb

Power Requirements

48 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

Front View

Figure A-14 shows a front view of the phy modules fan tray.

Fan Status /Fan Tray No. 2

Figure A-14. Phy Modules Fan Tray

A-348/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
Timing Module/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)

Timing Module/Node Processor Adapter Fan


Tray (No. 1)
The timing module/node processor adaptor (NPA) fan tray (Fan Tray No. 1) provides
cooling for the timing and node processor adapter modules.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 6.00 in. (15.24 cm)

Width: 1.50 in. (3.81 cm)

Depth: 5.2 in. (13.21)

Weight: 1.5 lb

Power Requirements

3 Watts

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32qto 122qF)

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-35


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
Timing Module/Node Processor Adapter Fan Tray (No. 1)

Front View

Figure A-15 shows a front view of the timing module/NPA fan tray.

Fan Fault

Fan Tray
No. 1

Figure A-15. Timing Module/NPA Fan Tray

A-368/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit

AC-to-DC Rectifier Unit


The rectifier unit converts AC standard power to DC power, which is required by the
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch chassis.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 5.25 in.

Width: 19 in.

Depth: maximum 20 in.

Weight: 70 lb. (32 kg) with all four converter units installed

Power Requirements

Each power converter unit requires a separate circuit rated at 15A at 120V or 6A at
240V.

Agency Approvals

Worldwide regulatory approvals for safety and EMI

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32q to 122qF)

Physical Connectors

Standard IEC 320 connector on the rear of each power converter unit

DB external power alarm port

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-37


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
DC Input Power Protection Unit

DC Input Power Protection Unit


The DC input power protection unit (DCPPU) provides the GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch with additional protection from transients when the switch is connected
to a DC power source (transients can cause the switch to reboot, resulting in minutes
of downtime).

If you are using an AC power source, you do not need to use a DCPPU because the
rectifier has built-in transient protection.

See the section, in Chapter 2, for more information.

Specifications

Physical Dimensions

Height: 5.25 in. (13.33 cm)

Width: 17.63 in. (44.78 cm)

Depth: 15.25 in. (38.74)

Weight: 23 lb

Power Requirements
• 75A maximum input current
• Inputs A and B: -48 to -60 VDC
• Input Voltage Range: -40 to -72 Volts

A-388/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Specifications
DC Input Power Protection Unit

Agency Approvals
• Bellcore TR-TSY 001003
• ETSI ETS 300-132-2
• EN 60950
• UL 1950, 3rd Edition
• TS001 (AUSTEL, Australia), AS/NZS 3260: 1993
• BELLCORE GR-1089-CORE Issue 1
• BELLCORE GR-63-CORE Issue 1
• NEBs Compliant
• Compliance with AT&T spec 802-010-100

Temperature Range

0q to 50qC (32q to 122qF)

Physical Connectors

DB external power alarm port

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04A-39


Module Specifications
Beta Draft Confidential
DC Input Power Protection Unit

A-408/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

B
Cables and Pinout Assignments
This appendix provides cable diagrams and pinout assignments for the following
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch connectors and cables:
• Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable with 9-pin to 25-pin
Adapter
• Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable
• DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable
• RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic Cable
• MPK Null Modem Converter
• NET MGMT Connector
• EXT PWR ALARM Connector on Node Processor Adapter Module
• Diagnostics Port Connector
• Multimode Fiber Cable

Purchasing Cables
You can purchase the required cables from Lucent Technologies. Be sure to use the
appropriate product code when ordering. To obtain a list of current product codes,
contact your Lucent account manager.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-1


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
Shielded Cables

Shielded Cables
Shielded cables must be used for the console connections to ensure compliance with
the FCC Class A limits.

Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub


Diagnostic Cable with 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter
This cable is used for connecting a SPARCstation console to the NET MGMT port on
the node processor adapter (see Figure 4-7 in Chapter 4). Figure B-1 on page B-3
illustrates the cable and Table B-1 describes the pinouts for the cable’s connectors.
Table B-1. Pinouts – Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub
Diagnostic Cable with 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter

DB-25 Male Connector #1 DB-9 Male Connector #2

Pin Signal Pin Signal

3 RX (Receiving Data) 2 RX (Receiving Data)

2 TX (Transmit Data) 3 TX (Transmit Data)

4 RTS (Request To Send) 7 RTS (Request To Send)

20 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

5 CTS (Clear To Send) 8 CTS (Clear To Send)

6 DSR (Data Set Ready) 6 DSR (Data Set Ready)

8 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

7 GND (Signal Ground) 5 GND (Signal Ground)

B-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable with 9-pin to 25-pin Adapter

Male DB-25
Connector #1
(cable entry view) Male DB-9
Connector #2
Pin Pin (cable entry view)
13 25

Pin 9 Pin 5

Pin 6 Pin 1

Pin 1 Pin
14

Figure B-1. Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable with


9-pin to 25-pin Adapter

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-3


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable

Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub


Diagnostic Cable
This cable is used for connecting a PC console to the NET MGMT port on the node
processor adapter (see Figure 4-7 in Chapter 4). Figure B-2 on page B-5 illustrates the
cable and Table B-2 describes the pinouts for the cable’s connectors.
Table B-2. Pinouts – Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub
Diagnostic Cable

DB-9 Female Connector #1 DB-9 Male Connector #2

Pin Signal Pin Signal

2 RX (Receiving Data) 2 RX (Receiving Data)

3 TX (Transmit Data) 3 TX (Transmit Data)

7 RTS (Request To Send) 7 RTS (Request To Send)

4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

8 CTS (Clear To Send) 8 CTS (Clear To Send)

6 DSR (Data Set Ready) 6 DSR (Data Set Ready)

1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

5 GND (Signal Ground) 5 GND (Signal Ground)

B-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable

Female DB-9 Male DB-9


Connector #1 Connector #2
(cable entry view) (cable entry view)

Pin 1 Pin 6 Pin 9 Pin 5

Pin 5 Pin 9 Pin 6 Pin 1

Figure B-2. Shielded Straight-through 9-pin D-sub Diagnostic Cable

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-5


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable

DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable


This cable is used for connecting a modem to the NET MGMT port on the node
processor adapter (see Figure 4-7 in Chapter 4) for a remote dial-up console
connection. Figure B-3 on page B-7 illustrates the cable and Table B-3 describes the
pinouts for the cable’s connectors.
Table B-3. Pinouts – DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable

DB-25 Male Connector #1 DB-9 Male Connector #2

Pin Signal Pin Signal

8 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

2 TX (Transmit Data) 2 RX (Receiving Data)

3 RX (Receiving Data) 3 TX (Transmit Data)

20 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

7 GND (Signal Ground) 5 GND (Signal Ground)

6 DSR (Data Set Ready) 6 DSR (Data Set Ready)

4 RTS (Request To Send) 7 RTS (Request To Send)

5 CTS (Clear To Send) 8 CTS (Clear To Send)

22 RI (Ring Indicator) 9 RI (Ring Indicator)

B-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable

Male DB-25
Connector #1
(cable entry view) Male DB-9
Connector #2
Pin Pin (cable entry view)
13 25

Pin 9 Pin 5

Pin 6 Pin 1

Pin 1 Pin
14

Figure B-3. DB-9 to DB-25 Shielded Crossover Cable

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-7


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic Cable

RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic


Cable
The RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through cable (see Figure B-4 on page B-9) connection
from the BIO2 or NP2 diagnostics port to a terminal server is routed through a
modular processing kernel (MPK) null modem converter (see Figure B-5 on
page B-11). One end of the MPK converter is connected to the terminal server through
the RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through cable, and the other end connects to the BIO2 or
NP2 diagnostics port.

Table B-4 describes the RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through cable’s pinouts.


Table B-4. Pinouts – RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic Cable

RJ-45 Male Connector #1 Signal RJ-45 Male Connector #2

1 DSR (Data Set Ready) 1

2 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 2

3 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 3

4 GND (Signal Ground) 4

5 RX (Receive Data) 5

6 TX (Transmit Data) 6

7 CTS (Clear to Send) 7

8 RTS (Request to Send) 8

See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for information about the NP2 node
processor. See “ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module” on page A-5 for
information about the BIO2 module.

B-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Diagnostic Cable

8-pin RJ45 connector #1


(to MPK null modem connector) 8-pin RJ45 connector #2
(to console terminal)
Pin Pin
1 8

Pin Pin
8 1

Figure B-4. RJ-45 to RJ-45 Straight-through Cable

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-9


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
MPK Null Modem Converter

MPK Null Modem Converter


One end of the MPK null modem converter (see Figure B-5 on page B-11) connects
directly, through its RJ-45 lead, to the BIO2 or NP2 diagnostics port. The other end is
connected to the terminal server through the RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through cable
(see Figure B-4 on page B-9).

Table B-5 describes the MPK null modem converter’s pinouts.


Table B-5. Pinouts – MPK Null Modem Converter

Pin on MPK’s Connector Signal Pin on MPK’s Terminal


Interface Side Server Side
(to BIO2 or NP2 (to console terminal)
diagnostics port)

1 RTS (Request to Send) 8

2 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 3

3 TX (Transmit Data) 6

4 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 2

5 RX (Receive Data) 5

6 GND (Signal Ground) 4

7 DSR (Data Set Ready) 1

8 CTS (Clear to Send) 7

See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for information about the NP2 node
processor. See “ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module” on page A-5 for
information about the BIO2 module.

B-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
MPK Null Modem Converter

MPK

connects to terminal
server via RJ45-RJ45
connects to BIO2 or
NP2 Diagnostics port

Figure B-5. MPK Null Modem Converter

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-11


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
NET MGMT Connector

NET MGMT Connector


The NET MGMT connector (see Figure 4-7 in Chapter 4) accepts a 9-pin male
connector from one of the 9-pin cables that connects a console directly to the switch.

Table B-6 describes the NET MGMT connector’s pinouts.


Table B-6. Pinouts – NET MGMT Connector on NPA Module

DB-9 Female Connector

Pin Signal

1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

2 RX (Receiving Data)

3 TX (Transmit Data)

4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

5 GND (Signal Ground)

6 DSR (Data Set Ready)

7 RTS (Request To Send)

8 CTS (Clear To Send)

9 RI (Ring Indicator)

B-128/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
NET MGMT Connector

Pin 6 Pin 9

NET MGMT
Pin 1 Pin 5

Figure B-6. NET MGMT Connector on NPA Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-13


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
EXT PWR ALARM Connector on Node Processor Adapter Module

EXT PWR ALARM Connector on Node Processor


Adapter Module
The EXT PWR ALARM connector accepts a 9-pin female external power alarm cable
connector (see Figure 4-7 in Chapter 4).

Table B-7 describes the EXT PWR ALARM connector’s pinouts.


Table B-7. Pinouts – EXT PWR ALARM Connector on NPA Module

Pin Signal Definition Description


Number (TTL compatible)

5 UNIT PRESENT LOW when Signal tied low to indicate to


connected the system that a rectifier is
connected.

6 DC OK LOW for fault, Indicates loss of redundancy or


HIGH for normal abnormal operating condition,
operation requiring replacement of one
sub-unit.

7 AC UNIT LOW for AC unit Permanently connected to


signal return to indicate this
unit is AC-powered.

1 SIGNAL RTN Signal return Signal return in NPA interface


module of the GX 550 – not
necessarily referenced to
chassis ground or either
terminal of the rectifier output.

B-148/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
EXT PWR ALARM Connector on Node Processor Adapter Module

Pin 6 Pin 9

Pin 1 Pin 5

EXT PWR ALARM

Figure B-7. EXT PWR ALARM Connector on NPA Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-15


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
Diagnostics Port Connector

Diagnostics Port Connector


The type of diagnostics port for a BIO or NP module depends on the model type, as
follows:
• For a BIO1 or NP1 module, the diagnostics port is a 9-pin DB-9 connection.
• For the BIO2 or NP2, the diagnostics port is an 8-pin RJ-45 EIA-232/RS-232
interface.

Diagnostics Port for BIO1 or NP1 Modules


The Diagnostics Port connector accepts a 9-pin female connector from a 9-pin cable
that connects a console directly to a BIO1 or NP1 module (see Figure B-8 on
page B-17 for the diagnostics ports on the NP1 and BIO1 modules).

Table B-8 describes the BIO1’s or NP1’s diagnostics port connector’s pinouts.
Table B-8. Pinouts – Diagnostics Port Connector on BIO1 and NP1
Modules

DB-9 Male Connector

Pin Signal

1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

2 RX (Receiving Data)

3 TX (Transmit Data)

4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

5 GND (Signal Ground)

6 DSR (Data Set Ready)

7 RTS (Request To Send)

B-168/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
Diagnostics Port Connector

Table B-8. Pinouts – Diagnostics Port Connector on BIO1 and NP1


Modules

8 CTS (Clear To Send)

9 RI (Ring Indicator)

Diag. Port
Pin 9 Pin 5
Pin 5 Pin 1

Diag. Port

Pin 6 Pin 1
Pin 9
Pin 6

BIO1 Module NP1 Module

Figure B-8. Diagnostics Ports on BIO1 and NP1 Modules

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-17


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
Diagnostics Port Connector

Diagnostics Port for BIO2 or NP2 Modules


The BIO2 or NP2 diagnostics port (see Figure B-9 on page B-19) provides an
EIA-232/RS-232 interface for diagnostics through a terminal window. The connector
interface to the BIO2 or NP2 diagnostics port is an RJ-45 serial interface.

See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for information about the NP2 node
processor. See “ATM Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) Module” on page A-5 for
information about the BIO2 module.

RJ-45 Serial Interface

Table B-9 describes all 10 pinout signals for the RJ-45 serial interface, although only
eight pins are needed for the RJ-45-to-RJ45 straight-through cable (see Figure B-4 on
page B-9) and MPK null modem converter (see Figure B-5 on page B-11).
Table B-9. Pinouts – RJ-45 Serial Interface

Pin Signal

1 RI/DSR (Ring Indicator/Data Set Ready; selectable, the default is RI)

2 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)

3 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

4 GND (Digital Ground)

5 SDIN (RXD) [Serial Data In (Received Data)]

6 SDOUT (TXD) [Serial Data Out (Transmitted Data)]

7 CTS (Clear to Send)

8 RTS (Request to Send)

9 Chassis GND (Chassis Ground: Connector Shield)

B-188/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Cables and Pinout Assignments
Diagnostics Port Connector

Table B-9. Pinouts – RJ-45 Serial Interface (Continued)

Pin Signal

10 Chassis GND (Chassis Ground: Connector Shield

Pin 1 Pin 8
Diag. Port

Figure B-9. Diagnostics Port on BIO2 and NP2 Modules

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04B-19


Cables and Pinout Assignments
Beta Draft Confidential
Multimode Fiber Cable

Multimode Fiber Cable


A standard multimode fiber cable (see Figure B-10) connects the GX 550 ES™
(Extender Shelf) to the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch.

One end of the cable connects to the physical interface (phy) port on the uplink phy
module in the GX 550 ES. The other end connects to the GX 550 ES downlink phy
module in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch.

RX TX

TX Plugs into uplink Plugs into GX 550 ES RX


phy module downlink phy module

Figure B-10. Multimode Fiber Cable

B-208/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

C
Regulatory Information
This appendix describes the following regulatory information for the
GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch:
• Regulatory Standards Compliance
• Radio Frequency Interference
• VCCI Statement

Regulatory Standards Compliance


The following regulatory agencies have approved the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch and have found it to be fully compliant with their environmental, safety, and
emissions standards.

Environmental
Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) GR-63-CORE and GR-1089-CORE

Safety
• UL 1950
• CSA 950
• EN60950
• TS001

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04C-1


Regulatory Information
Beta Draft Confidential
Radio Frequency Interference

EMC
• FCC Part 15 Class A
• EN55022 Class A
• EN50082-1
• VCCI Class 1

Factory Approvals
• UL
• TUV
• BABT 340

Radio Frequency Interference

Caution – In accordance with FCC Part 15 Subpart B requirements, changes or


! modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Lucent Technologies
could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch is designed for Class A use only. Do not
attempt to use this equipment in a domestic environment, which requires a Class B
distinction. These switches cause interference with domestic products.

C-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Regulatory Information
VCCI Statement

This equipment produces electromagnetic energy at radio frequencies and, if not


installed and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions as contained
in this document, could cause interference to radio communications and/or interfere
with the operation of other RF devices. The equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part
15 of the FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of the equipment in a residential area may cause interference. Should this occur, the
user may be required to discontinue operation of the equipment, or take other such
measures as may be adequate to rectify the condition at the user’s expense.

VCCI Statement

Translation: This is a Class A product based on the standards of the Voluntary


Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If
this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may arise. When
such trouble occurs, the user may be required to take corrective actions.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04C-3


Regulatory Information
Beta Draft Confidential
BSMI Statement

BSMI Statement

C-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

D
Module Redundancy
This appendix describes the module redundancy features of the GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch. The GX 550 redundancy and recovery consists of both hardware and
software mechanisms that enable the switch to continue operation after certain types
of failures.

Redundant Module Types


The GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch can support a fully redundant pair of the
following types of modules:
• Node processor (NP1 and NP2) modules (See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2
(NP2)” for information about the NP2 node processor.)
• Timing modules
• Switch fabric (SF) modules
• GX 550 ES (Extender Shelf) downlink phy modules (if supported)

A redundant pair consists of identically configured modules of the same model type.

Note – Read the applicable GX 550 switch software release notice (SRN) to
determine whether the GX 550 ES is supported in your current release.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04D-1


Module Redundancy
Beta Draft Confidential
Setting Up Redundant Modules

Setting Up Redundant Modules


To set up a pair of redundant modules:
1. Install the redundant modules (see Chapter 7, “Removing and Installing
Components”) in the appropriate slots:
• Redundant NPs must be installed in slots 1 and 2 (see Figure D-1).
• Redundant SFs must be installed in slots 1A and 1B (see Figure D-1).
• Redundant timing modules must be installed in slots 1C and 1D
(see Figure D-2 on page D-3).
Node Processing
Modules (slots 1
and 2)

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor

Diag. Port Good


Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric

Good
Failed
StnBy

Fan Status
Fan Tray
No. 3

Switch Fabric Good


Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed
Good
Failed

Modules (slots 1A
and 1B)
Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms Alarms
Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4

Figure D-1. Redundant NP and SF Modules (front)

D-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Redundancy
Setting Up Redundant Modules

Timing Modules
(slots 1C and 1D)

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12
STM1 STM4 STM4
PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM

Figure D-2. Redundant Timing Modules (rear)


2. Specify the active and the standby module with the NMS (see the B-STDX, CBX,
and GX Switch Module Configuration Guide).

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04D-3


Module Redundancy
Beta Draft Confidential
Node Processor Redundancy

Node Processor Redundancy


Redundant NP modules (active and standby) monitor each other's integrity through
the use of a keep-alive protocol. A redundancy manager in each NP exchanges
keep-alive messages over the cell bus. See Chapter 8, “Node Processor 2 (NP2)” for
information about upgrading from NP1s to NP2s.

Note – During NP upgrades, the NP2 can be configured as a redundant (standby) NP


for an NP1, but an NP1 cannot be configured as a standby NP for an NP2.

Active NP Failure
The NP module configured as the standby partner continually polls the active NP
module for its operational status. If the standby NP detects a failure in the active NP:
1. The standby NP disables the active NP and performs a warm boot to become the
active NP.
2. The new active NP isolates the failed NP, using special redundancy hardware.
3. The new active NP keeps the old active NP isolated until it is fully booted up.
4. When the old active NP finishes booting, it then acts as the standby NP and begins
to send keep-alive polls to the new active module.

Standby NP Failure
The NP module configured as the standby NP has an internal “watchdog” that
continually polls the standby NP for its operational status. If the watchdog detects any
failure in the standby NP, it disables and isolates the standby NP and reports the
problem to the NMS.

D-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Redundancy
Node Processor Redundancy

PRAM Synchronization
Both SNMP and TFTP mechanisms are used to keep the PRAM of redundant NP
modules synchronized.

All PRAM downloads go to the active NP module. After the active NP receives a new
PRAM, it downloads the new PRAM to its redundant partner.

The active NP monitors the PRAM in the standby NP and automatically downloads
the PRAM if a mismatch is detected.

If you install a standby NP that does not contain boot flash or application code, the
active NP automatically downloads them to the standby NP.

NP Switchovers
The redundancy scheme provides a fault-tolerant system. If an NP fails, the
switchover to the standby NP does not cause a loss of data, because data is transferred
through the SF, and the Virtual Network Navigator (VNN) routing tables reside on the
BIOs. During the NP reboot, new PVCs/SVCs can be established and rerouting of
existing PVCs/SVCs can occur for this node, but no IP routing can occur through this
node (i.e., no NMS traffic).

Manual Switchover of Active NP


The NMS enables a user to manually switch operation from an active NP module to
the standby NP module. Lucent recommends that you perform a manual switchover to
the standby NP before removing an active NP (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch
Module Configuration Guide). The resulting reset process is the same as if the standby
module detected a failure with the active module.

Note – Selecting the standby NP during a manual switchover also selects the
switching fabric and timing modules simultaneously.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04D-5


Module Redundancy
Beta Draft Confidential
Switch Fabric and Timing Module Redundancy

Switch Fabric and Timing Module Redundancy


The active NP module continually monitors the health and operational status of the
active SF and timing modules.

Active Switch Fabric or Timing Module Failure


If the NP detects a failure in the active SF or timing module, it initiates a switchover to
the standby SF or timing module and reports the problem to the NMS.

Active Switch Fabric or Timing Module Removal


If you remove an active SF or timing module, the NP automatically initiates a
switchover to a standby module if one is present.

Caution – Operating the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch with no timing module
! will shut down the cooling fans and can cause equipment damage from overheating.
If no standby timing module is installed, power down the switch before removing the
timing module.

Manual Switchover of Active SF or Timing Module


The NMS enables a user to manually switch operation from an active SF or timing
module to the standby module (see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module
Configuration Guide).

D-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Redundancy
GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module Redundancy

GX 550 ES Downlink Phy Module Redundancy


Note – Read the applicable GX 550 switch software release notice (SRN) to
determine whether the GX 550 ES is supported in your current release

Redundancy of the GX 550 ES downlink phy module is achieved by installing two


independent GX 550 ES downlink phy modules in the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch and designating one as active and the other as standby.

For optimum fault coverage, connect each downlink phy module into a 1:1 redundant
BIO module. Fault monitoring and switchover from the active to the standby module
is controlled by GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch software.

Each GX 550 ES downlink phy module must connect to one uplink phy module in the
GX 550 ES, by using a standard multimode fiber cable.

Redundancy Status
The GX 550 ES downlink phy module does not have a redundancy status LED, so the
redundancy status of each downlink phy module can be read via the NavisCore NMS.
For more information, see the B-STDX, CBX, and GX Switch Module Configuration
Guide.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04D-7


Module Redundancy
Beta Draft Confidential
Redundancy Status (StnBy) LEDs

Redundancy Status (StnBy) LEDs


The NP, SF, and timing modules each have a StnBy LED to indicate whether the
module is the active module or the standby module.

Redundancy Status LED (StnBy) on Node Processor


Table D-1 describes the StnBy LED on the NP1 or NP2 (see Figure D-3).
Table D-1. StnBy LED on an NP Module

Module Redundancy Status StnBy LED State

Module is the active module and a standby module is installed. ON

Module is the standby module. BLINKING

Module is the active module and no standby module is installed. OFF

Good
Marg.
Failed Good
StnBy Failed

Node Processor StnBy LED

Figure D-3. StnBy LED for an NP Module

D-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Module Redundancy
Redundancy Status (StnBy) LEDs

Redundancy Status LED (StnBy) on Switch Fabric and


Timing Modules
Table D-2 describes the StnBy LED on the SF (see Figure D-4) and on the timing
module (see Figure D-5).
Table D-2. StnBy LEDs for the SF and Timing Modules

Module Redundancy Status StnBy LED State

Module is the standby module. ON

Module is the active module. OFF

Good
Failed
StnBy

Switch Fabric StnBy LED

Figure D-4. StnBy LED for the SF Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module StnBy LED

Figure D-5. StnBy LED for the Timing Module

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04D-9


Module Redundancy
Beta Draft Confidential
Redundancy Status (StnBy) LEDs

D-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

E
Fiber Cable Management
This appendix describes the optional fiber cable management system which can be
used with the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch.

Fiber Cable Management Tray


The fiber cable management tray attaches directly to the GX 550 Multiservice WAN
switch chassis and allows for adjustable management of the fiber-optic cables plugged
into the rear of the switch.

Note – This fiber cable management tray may only be used on a GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch installed in an open frame equipment rack. It is not designed for use in an
enclosed equipment rack.

The fiber cable management tray (Product code: 11666) can be purchased from
Lucent Technologies. Figure E-1 on page E-2 details the different parts of the fiber
cable management tray.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04E-1


Fiber Cable Management
Beta Draft Confidential
Before Handling Equipment

Access cover Mounting rails Mounting screws

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx

Fiber cable tray containing slots for cables

Figure E-1. The Fiber Cable Management Tray

Before Handling Equipment


Warning – Static electricity can damage the equipment. Wear an antistatic strap when
handling any of the switch components.

Before handling any of the switch components, put on the antistatic wrist strap that is
provided in the GX 550’s accessory kit, and connect it to the grounding jack on the
front or rear of the switch (see Figure 3-2 in Chapter 3).

E-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Fiber Cable Management
Fiber Cable Management Tray Installation

Required Tools and Materials


To install the fiber cable management tray, the following tools and materials are
required:
• Four #6 panhead screws (provided with the fiber cable management tray)
• A #2 Phillips screwdriver
• An antistatic wrist strap (included in the GX 550’s accessory kit)

Fiber Cable Management Tray Installation


The fiber cable management tray is installed by attaching the mounting rails to the left
and right sides of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch chassis.

Note – It is recommended that two fiber cable management trays be installed; one
each for the top and bottom rows of phy cards installed in the GX 550 Multiservice
WAN switch.

To install the fiber cable management tray:


1. Select two adjacent holes on the right side of the switch where you want to attach
the right side of the cable management tray. See Figure E-2 on page E-4 for the
hole locations.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04E-3


Fiber Cable Management
Beta Draft Confidential
Fiber Cable Management Tray Installation

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Mounting
Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx
OC3
STM1
PHY
OC12
STM4
PHY
OC12
STM4
PHY
Rx
OC3
STM1
PHY
holes
MM MM MM MM

(left and right


side of
chassis)
Good Good Good
Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx

Rx Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48 OC3
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16 STM1
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM MM

Fan Fault

Figure E-2. Mounting Holes on the GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch


2. Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the two flathead screws currently in the
holes.

E-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Fiber Cable Management
Fiber Cable Management Tray Installation

3. Align the two screw holes on the right mounting rail with the selected screw holes
on the GX 550’s chassis (see Figure E-3).

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1
PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Fan Fault

Figure E-3. Attaching the Fiber Cable Management Tray to the GX 550

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04E-5


Fiber Cable Management
Beta Draft Confidential
Cable Distribution

4. Using the #2 Phillips screwdriver, install two #6 panhead screws through the right
mounting rail into the right side of the switch chassis (see Figure E-3 on
page E-5).
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the left side mounting rail of the fiber cable
management tray.

Cable Distribution
The fiber-optic cables attached to the rear of the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch
may now be distributed through the slots in the cable management tray. To distribute
the cables:
1. Using your fingers, loosen the two thumb screws on the top of the access cover on
the fiber cable management tray.
2. Holding the thumb screws, slide the access cover towards you and off the tray.
3. Thread the fiber-optic cables from the rear of the GX 550 through the slots in the
fiber cable management tray so the cables are directed out the side of the tray
(see Figure E-4 on page E-7). Slide the tray forward or backward as necessary to
access the cables or phy cards.

E-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential Fiber Cable Management
Cable Distribution

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

Timing Module

Good
Failed
StnBy

NPA Module

EXT PWR ALARM ALARM STATUS NET MGNT ENET T1-0 IN T1-1 IN T1 OUT E1-0 IN E1-1 IN E1 OUT
Fan Tray
No. 1
Fan

Status

Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good


Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 2 Tx 2

Rx Rx

Tx 3 Tx 3
Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx

Rx Rx

Tx 4 Tx 4

Rx Rx
OC3 OC12 OC12 OC3
STM1 STM4 STM4 STM1
PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM

Good Good
Fail Fail
Tx 1 Tx 1

Rx Rx

Tx 2

Rx

Rx
Rx Rx Rx Rx

Tx 3

Rx

Tx 4

Rx
OC3 OC48 OC12 OC48 OC48 OC48
STM1 STM16 STM4 STM16 STM16 STM16
PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY PHY
MM MM MM MM MM MM

Fan Fault

Figure E-4. Threading Fiber-optic Cables in the Tray


4. When the fiber-optic cables have been placed in the tray, place the access cover
back on the tray and tighten the two thumb screws with your fingers.

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04E-7


Fiber Cable Management
Beta Draft Confidential
Cable Distribution

E-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential

Acronyms
This guide uses the following acronyms:

Acronym Description

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

BICI Broadband Inter-Carrier Interface

BIO, BIO2 Base Input/Output, Base Input/Output 2

CE circuit emulation

CPE customer premise equipment

CPT cell processing threads

CSU channel service unit

DCE data communications equipment

DCPPU DC input power protection unit

DSU data service unit

DTE data terminal equipment

ECP egress cell processing

Gbps gigabits per second

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide Acronyms-1


Beta Draft Confidential
Acronyms

Acronym Description

ICMX ingress cell multiplexer

ICP ingress cell processing

IISP Interim Inter-switch Signaling Protocol

Kbps kilobits per second

Mbps megabits per second

MIM module identification memory

NEBS Network Equipment-Building System

NP, NP2 node processor, node processor 2

NPA node processor adapter

NMS Network Management System

OS Operating System

PAC processor and ATM control

Phy physical interface module

PMD physical media dependent

PNNI Private Network-to-Network Interface

PRAM parameter random access memory

PTMCTL Port Timing Controller

QoS Quality of Service

SAR segmentation and reassembly

SC subscriber connector

SF switch fabric module

Acronyms-2 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Beta Draft Confidential
Acronyms

Acronym Description

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

TC Transmission Convergence

TM timing module; Traffic Management

UNI User-to-Network Interface

VNN Virtual Network Navigator

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide Acronyms-3


Beta Draft Confidential
Acronyms

Acronyms-4 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Index

A Alarms
DCPPU, 2-11
Accessory kit, 3-5 port, 6-12
Active NP failure, D-4 remote, 4-24
Active SF failure, D-6 signal pinouts, 4-24
Active timing module failure, D-6 Antistatic wrist strap, 3-6, 7-2
AC-to-DC rectifier unit APS. See Automatic Protection Switching
features, 2-3 Automatic Protection Switching, 1-9
ordering, 2-3
specifications, A-37
Admin status B
for BIO module, 7-12, 7-15
for Node Processor (NP) modules, 9-25 Base Input/Output 2 (BIO2) module
for node processor module, 8-6 to 8-11 agency approvals, A-5
for physical ports, 7-18, 7-26, 7-33 depiction of, A-6
Agency approvals, A-5 front view, A-6
Air filter installation physical dimensions, A-5
phy module fan tray (no. 2), 7-60 power requirements, A-5
switch fabric/node processor fan tray specifications, A-5 to A-6
(no. 3), 7-45 standards, A-6
Air filter removal temperature range, A-5
base input/output fan tray (no. 4), 7-53 upgrading, 7-15 to 7-17
phy module fan tray (no. 2), 7-58 Base input/output module
switch fabric/node processor fan tray admin status, 7-12, 7-15
(no. 3), 7-44 DIP switches, 10-3

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04Index-1


Index

installation, 7-13 power cables, 5-4


LEDs, 6-3, 6-8 remote alarms, 4-24
locations within switch, 3-9 Connectors
overview, 1-6 DB-26, 4-24
phy module interfaces, 1-7 diagnostics port
rebooted by node processor, 10-5 for BIO or NP1, B-16
removal, 7-12 for NP2, 8-2
specifications, A-2 EXT PWR ALARM, B-14
troubleshooting, 10-7 NET MGMT, B-12
BIO module. See Base input/output module Console terminal, connecting, 4-14
Boot process Customer service, 1-v
NP and BIO module LEDs, 6-8

D
C
Damaged product
Cables, B-1 instructions for, 1-v
connecting to GX 550 switch, 4-13 Data connections, 4-13
DB-9 to DB-25 shielded crossover, B-6 DB-26 connector, 4-24
fiber-optic distribution in fiber cable DB-9 to DB-25 shielded crossover cable,
management tray, E-6 B-6
RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through DC input power protection unit
diagnostic, B-8 alarm signals for external power, 2-11
shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub cable installations on back, 2-7 to 2-9
diagnostic, B-4 external power alarm signals, 2-11
with 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, B-2 features, 2-5
Cell thread interface connecting NPs, 1-8 front panel, 2-6
Clock source front view, 2-4
external E1, 4-23 LEDs, 2-10
external T1, 4-21 operating status, 2-10
Compliance, C-1 ordering, 2-11
Connecting powering up, 2-10
console terminal, 4-14 specifications, A-38
external clock, 4-21 test points on front panel, 2-10
fiber-optic cables, 4-13 DC power supply warnings, 2-15
Network Management Station, 4-16 DCPPU. See DC input power protection unit

Index-28/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Index

Diagnostic cables F
RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through, B-8
shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub, B-4 Fan tray installation
with 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, B-2 base input/output (no. 4), 7-51
Diagnostics port connector phy modules (no. 2), 7-57
for BIO module, B-16 switch fabric/node processor (no. 3), 7-43
for NP1 module, B-16 timing/node processor adapter (no. 1),
for NP2 module, 8-2 7-47
Diagnostics, power-up, 10-2 Fan tray LEDs, 6-17
DIP switches, 10-2 to 10-4 Fan tray removal
on BIO module, 10-3 base input/output (no. 4), 7-49
on NP module, 10-2 switch fabric/node processor (no. 3), 7-41
Documentation timing/node processor adapter (no. 1),
reading path, xxvi 7-46
related, xxxii Fan tray specifications
Downlink phy module. See GX 550 ES base input/output (no. 4), A-33
downlink phy module phy modules (no. 2), A-34
switch fabric/node processor (no. 3), A-31
timing/node processor adapter (no. 1),
E A-35
Fiber cable management tray
Electronic/electrical requirements, 2-1 installing, E-3
Equipment rack overview, E-1
19-inch rack Fiber-optic cables, connecting, 4-13
mid-mounting, 4-6, 4-8, 4-10
Ethernet connection of NMS to switch
direct, 4-18 G
indirect, 4-19
EXT PWR ALARM connector, B-14 Grounding
External clock strap, 3-6, 7-2
connecting inputs and outputs, 4-21 GX 550 ES downlink phy module
E1 source, 4-23 installation, 7-30
T1 source, 4-21 LEDs, 6-5
External power alarm signals, 2-11 overview, 1-10
redundancy, D-7
removal, 7-27

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04Index-3


Index

slot 12 restrictions, 7-30 switch fabric/node processor fan tray


GX 550 switch (no. 3), 7-43
determining operating status, 6-1 switch fabric/node processor fan tray air
features, 1-3 filter, 7-45
installation. See Installing GX 550 switch timing module, 7-36
moving to installation site, 3-4 timing/node processor adapter fan tray
(no. 1), 7-47
operating environment, 2-13
Installing GX 550 switch, 4-1
physical specifications, 2-12
precautions, 7-2
powering up, 5-1 to 5-7
prerequisites, 3-1
product description, 1-1
required tools and equipment, 4-2
site specifications, 2-13
site selection, 3-2
space requirements, 2-14
site specifications, 2-13
transient power protection, 2-2
troubleshooting, 10-5
unpacking, 3-4
verifying hardware configuration, 3-6
L
voltage range, 2-2
LEDs
base input/output module, 6-3, 6-8
during boot process, 6-8
I DC input power protection unit, 2-10
fan trays, 6-17
Installing
node processor module, 6-2, 6-8, 6-15
base input/output fan tray (no. 4), 7-51
during boot process, 6-8
base input/output module, 7-13
phy module, 6-5, 6-11
fiber cable management tray, E-3
port alarm, 6-12
GX 550 ES downlink phy module, 7-30
redundancy, 6-15, D-8
GX 550 switch. See Installing GX 550
switch standby, 6-15
node processor adapter module, 7-39 switch fabric module, 6-4, 6-10, 6-16
node processor module, 7-6 switch status, 6-7
OC-12c/STM-4 phy module, 7-21 timing module, 6-6, 6-10, 6-16
OC-3c/STM-1 phy module, 7-21 troubleshooting the BIO module, 10-7
OC-48/STM-16 phy module, 7-21 troubleshooting the switch, 10-5
phy modules fan tray (no. 2), 7-57 viewing, 6-1
phy modules fan tray air filter, 7-60 Location of modules, 1-4
switch fabric module, 7-10 Lucent Technical Assistance Center, 1-v

Index-48/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Index

M configuring timing module, 8-6


DIP switches, 10-2
Maintenance agreement, 1-v installation, 7-6
Manual switchover LEDs, 6-2, 6-8, 6-15
of NP module, D-5 overview, 1-8
of SF module, D-6 reboot of BIO modules, 10-5
of timing module, D-6 redundancy, D-4
Mid-mount brackets, 4-6, 4-8, 4-10 removal, 7-3
Mid-mount installation, 4-6, 4-8, 4-10 specifications, A-8
Mid-mounting standby, D-4
in 19-inch equipment rack, 4-6, 4-8, 4-10 switchovers, 8-3, D-5
Modular Processing Kernel, B-8 manual, D-5
null modem converter, B-10 to B-11 Node Processor (NP)
pinouts, B-17 admin status, 9-25
Module configuring switching fabric module, 9-25
descriptions, 1-6 to 1-11 configuring timing module, 9-25
locations, 1-4 Node processor adapter
Module standards, A-6 installation, 7-39
MPK. See Modular Processing Kernel overview, 1-10
removal, 7-38
specifications, A-27
N NP module. See Node processor
NP1. Acronym for original node processor
NavisXtend Tools, 7-16 NP2. Acronym for node processor 2
NET MGMT connector, B-12 NPA module. See Node processor adapter
Network Management Station connection, Null modem converter, B-10 to B-11
4-16
using direct ethernet, 4-18
using indirect ethernet, 4-19 O
using management VC/PVC, 4-20
NMS. See Network Management Station Operating environment, 2-13
Node processor Operating status
active, D-4 from LEDs
admin status, 8-6 base input/output module, 6-3, 6-9, 6-12
cell thread interface, 1-8 DC input power protection unit, 2-10
configuring switching fabric module, 8-6 fan trays, 6-17

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04Index-5


Index

node processor module, 6-2, 6-7, 6-9, MPK null modem converter, B-10
6-15 NET MGMT connector, B-12
physical interface module, 6-5, 6-11 remote alarm signal, 4-24
switch fabric module, 6-4, 6-10, 6-16 RJ-45 serial interface, B-18
timing module, 6-6, 6-10, 6-16 RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through cable, B-8
node processor, 8-11 shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub
submodules, 8-12 diagnostic cable, B-4
with 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, B-2
Port alarm LEDs, 6-12, 6-14
P Port numbering, 6-13
Power
Parts repair, 7-2 applying to the switch, 5-7
Phy module connection methods
automatic protection switching, 1-9 AC-to-DC rectifier, 5-2
installation, 7-21 DC input power protection unit, 5-2
interfaces to BIO module, 1-7 DC power source, 5-2
LEDs, 6-5, 6-11 illustration, 5-5
overview, 1-9 DC power supply warnings, 2-15
removal, 7-18 prerequisites for powering up GX 550, 5-1
slot 12 restrictions, 7-22 specifications, 2-1
specifications Power requirements, A-5
GX 550 ES downlink, A-24 Power-up diagnostics, 10-2
OC12c/STM-4, A-16 PRAM synchronization, D-5
OC3c/STM-1, A-12
OC48/STM-16, A-20
Physical dimensions, A-5 R
Pinouts
assignments, B-1 Rack-mount installation, 4-3
DB-26 connector, 4-24 Radio frequency interference, C-2
DB-9 to DB-25 shielded crossover cable, Rebooting of BIO modules by node
B-6 processor, 10-5
diagnostics port connector Rectifier features, 2-3
for BIO or NP1, B-16 Redundancy
for NP2, B-10 configuring, D-2
EXT PWR ALARM connector, B-14 GX 550 ES downlink, D-7
for RJ-45 serial interfaces, B-18 LEDs, 6-15, D-8

Index-68/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Index

module types, D-1 RJ-45 to RJ-45 straight-through diagnostic


NP1, D-4 cable, B-8
switch fabric module, D-6
timing module, D-6
viewing node processor status, 8-11 S
Regulatory
information, C-1 Safety warnings, 2-16
standards, C-1 Serial interfaces
Remote alarms RJ-45, B-18
connecting, 4-24 straight-through cable for, B-8
signal pinouts, 4-24 Set Card Attributes dialog box
signals, 4-24 configuring for the Node Processor, 9-25
Removal precautions, 7-2 configuring for the node processor, 8-5
Removing SF module. See Switch fabric module
base input/output fan tray (no. 4), 7-49 Shielded straight-through 9-pin D-sub
diagnostic cable, B-4
base input/output fan tray air filter, 7-53
with 9-pin to 25-pin adapter, B-2
base input/output module, 7-12
Site
GX 550 ES downlink phy module, 7-27
selection, 3-2
node processor adapter module, 7-38
specifications, 2-13
node processor module, 7-3
Slot 12 restrictions, 3-10
phy module, 7-18
GX 550 ES downlink phy module, 7-30
phy modules fan tray air filter, 7-58
phy module, 7-22
switch fabric module, 7-8
Space requirements, 2-14
switch fabric/node processor fan tray
(no. 3), 7-41 Specifications
switch fabric/node processor fan tray air AC-to-DC rectifier unit, A-37
filter, 7-44 BIO modules, A-2
timing module, 7-34 DC input power protection unit, A-38
timing/node processor adapter fan tray fan trays
(no. 1), 7-46 BIO module, A-33
Repair of parts, 7-2 node processor, A-31
Restrictions on slot 12, 3-10 node processor adapter, A-35
GX 550 ES downlink phy module, 7-30 phy module, A-34
phy module, 7-22 switch fabric, A-31
RJ-45 serial interface, B-18 timing module, A-35
straight-through cable for, B-8 node processor, A-8

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04Index-7


Index

node processor adapter module, A-27 PRAM, D-5


phy modules
GX 550 ES downlink, A-24
OC12c/STM-4, A-16 T
OC3c/STM-1, A-12
OC-48/STM-16, A-20 Technical Assistance Center, xxxiii
switch fabric module, A-10 Telephone equipment
timing module, A-29 problems with, 1-vi
Standby LEDs, 6-15 Temperature range, A-5
Standby NP failure, D-4 Test points on DCPPU, 2-10
Static protection, 3-6, 7-2 Timing module
Straight-through cable configuring, 8-6, 9-25
pinouts, B-8 failure, D-6
Switch fabric module installation, 7-36
active, D-6 LEDs, 6-6, 6-10, 6-16
configuring, 8-6 overview, 1-11
installation, 7-10 redundancy, D-6
LEDs, 6-4, 6-10, 6-16 removal, 7-34
overview, 1-7 specifications, A-29
redundancy, D-6 switchovers
removal, 7-8 manual, D-6
specifications, A-10 Transient power protection, 2-2
switchovers Troubleshooting
manual, D-6 BIO module, 10-7
Switch status LEDs, 6-7 power-up diagnostics, 10-2
Switching fabric switch problems, 10-5
configuring, 9-25
Switchover
of node processor module, D-5 U
manual, D-5
of switch fabric module Unpacking
manual, D-6 accessory kit, 3-5
of timing module switch, 3-4
manual, D-6 Upgrading
Sybase Database Upgrade, 7-16 to 7-17 BIO1 modules to BIO2 modules, 7-15 to
7-17
Synchronization

Index-88/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


Index

Sybase database, 7-16 to 7-17

V
VCCI statement, C-3
Voltage range, 2-2

W
Warnings
DC power supply, 2-15
safety, 2-16

GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide 8/2/04Index-9


Index

Index-108/2/04 GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide


GX 550 Multiservice WAN Switch Hardware Installation Guide
Customer Comments
Please take time to fill out this questionnaire so that we can do our best to meet
your documentation needs. Then fax or e-mail your comments to our Technical
Publications Dept. Your opinions are of great value to us!

FAX: (978) 692-1510 (Attn: Tech Pubs)


E-MAIL: cspubs@lucent.com

What tasks did you perform using this guide?

Did you install the hardware/software?


If you were having trouble performing a task, were you able to find the
information you needed? Was the index useful?

Were the examples and illustrations helpful for performing tasks? If not, how
can they be improved?

Was there any information you needed that was not in the manual? If so, how
can we best deliver that information to you?
Cut Here

What did you like/not like about the manual?

Do you have any other comments about the manual?

Page Description of Error

Name Company
Mailing Address

Phone E-mail address


Fax No.

Potrebbero piacerti anche